Home

DARDO PLUS PC LITE - Schneider Electric

1. Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider EN 23 d Electric EN 24 Disabled 1 Test 2 Restore 3 Utility 4 Dardo eye line short circuit 5 Fault 6 Emergency 7 Communication 8 Manual and programmed function and autonomy tests are disabled A 24 Vdc signal is present on the command input and the control unit transmits the test command signal to the lights for the time that this signal is active The length of the signal determines whether it is a function or an autonomy test A 24 Vdc signal is present on the command input and the transition between signal missing and signal present is detected The control unit transmits the RESTORE command to the lights A 24 Vdc signal is present on the command input and the transition between signal missing and signal present is detected The control unit transmits the UTILITY emergency disabled command There is a short circuit on the communication line with the lights The lights connected following a Test reported a fault Some or all of the lights configured have signalled the absence of the recharging network to the control unit A serial communication error is detected The signal is active when the box next to the writing is selected Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE amp Electric Authorisations Program users can be administrators or generic users there is a password
2. Lite Map Customer 0 fisss se 2 OK Fen tre principale Les boutons de commande permettent d effectuer rapidement certaines op rations bon nombre de celles ci s effectuent en cliquant sur les objets avec le bouton droit de la souris File Configuration Authorizations Options ustem Level Login DefaultAdministrator s FR 6 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric Les boutons ont les fonctions suivantes e Bouton Nouveau 1 Permet d entrer un nouveau systeme ou un nouveau poste sur l cran Le type d objet entre depend du niveau o l on se trouve e Bouton Supprimer 2 Permet d effacer objet s lectionn sur l cran e Bouton Propri t s 3 Permet de visualiser les propri t s de l objet s lectionn sur l cran e Bouton Lancer acquisition 4 Permet de lancer l acquisition e Bouton Arr ter l acquisition 5 Permet d interrompre acquisition Dans ce cas l toutes les commandes en suspens sur les postes sont supprim es e Bouton Quitter 6 Permet de sortir du programme apres avoir arr t acquisition e Bouton Restauration base de donn es 7 charge la derni re copie de la base de donn es depuis le sous dossier tempbck du r pertoire d installation Presser ce bouton pour fermer le programme afin de permettre le chargement des donn es d
3. Set date and time Obecn vlastnosti DARDO PLUS RM 1 General Status Test Mame Dardo Plus 1 5 Address Acquisition cycles LI DL Notes Es CS 22 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE amp Electric V ok nku ozna en m 1 je mo n d c jednotce p id lit n zev Parametr cykly sb ru dat je na za tku nastaven na hodnotu 1 Tento parametr ozna uje etnost prov d n sb ru dat z d c jednotky vzhledem k cykl m prov d n sb ru dat Hodnota 1 znamen e se sb r dat z d c jednotky bude prov d t p i ka d m cyklu sb ru dat Hodnota 2 znamen Ze se sb r dat z d c jednotky bude prov d t p i ka d m druh m cyklu sb ru dat Hodnota O znamen Ze se sb r dat z d c jednotky nebude prov d t nikdy V ok nku ozna en m 3 oper tor m e z skat pol ko na libovoln popisn pozn mky V ok nku ozna en m 4 oper tor m e m nit adresu zen d c jednotky Stav DARDO PLUS RM 1 General Status Test M Inhibition Short eye Fault Emergency Communication Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 23 Electric CS 24 Zablokov n 1 Test 2 Restore 3 Utility 4 Zkrat na lince Dardo eye 5 Anom lie 6 Pohotovost 7 Komunikac
4. aaa Authorizations Lamp information New communications port Remove communications pork Substitute modem Use this menu after executing an acquisition to display what has been detected concerning the lights during the connection Control unit route Information 09 gt 01 e Lever OVA Dardo Plus 1 DN 9 La mpz inserted 41 09 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt D1 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt D01 OD 1 T nf Gip Lamps not inserted 59 You can read the following information in the window EN 38 The lights detected by the system during the connection 1 The numbers of the lights available to the connection 2 The option of saving this data on a text file 3 Schneider save file Dardo Plus PC LITE Events Recording events The program records all events using a database with a circular gueue structure that is to say the first event recorded is the first to be deleted FIFO when the space is full The number of events you want to keep defined by the available space is defined by the user in the Modify Parameters menu When closing the program if the user answers yes to the question in the window which appears before closing a copy of the database is saved in a folder named with a number corresponding to the day of the week The file is c
5. 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVERI First mi meet Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 23 SERVER First II PU Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 06 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First Mf BO Jlamprequied Deiadbbdntrtiso 91 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First ON meet Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M BA Lamprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVERT First ON Lamprequied Defaul dministrator 31 06 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First II Se Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERI First mi Z L mprequired Detaull dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERT First II D Jlamprequied JDetaut dministator 51 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERI First ON 2 pred Delauk dministratar 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M 2 Lampreguied O 1 Defaul amp dministatoo 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERI First ON i L mprequired O Default amp dministator AA as a 3108 2007 9 03 18 SERVERT First O efault dministrator 317082007 3 03 18 SERVERI Pal of 31 0872007 8 5346 D 31 08 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M Di DefaultAdministratar D Lamp required DefaultAdministratar Login Default amp dministrator Default amp dministrator Control unit route LEVEL SERVER First FloorDardo Plus 1 Number of records peso C vm EEE Les colonnes de gauche a
6. EN 7 Schneider Electric CAUTION RESTORE DATABASE WRITES THE LAST COPY OF THE DATABASE OVER THE ONE CURRENTLY IN USE ANY CHANGES MADE BETWEEN THE TIME THE COPY WAS MADE AND THE TIME IT WAS LOADED WILL BE LOST Level buttons e Button 10 displays the system level e Button 11 displays the control unit level e Button 12 displays the next level The buttons are only enabled if an object has been inserted in the current level Status boxes 9 60642007 11 25 25 GET LIGHT 1 43 System Level Level 18H ewh ames ando Plus 1 f TTT TTT The status boxes have the following boxes Level 1 this is the level displayed At Level 1 the systems are displayed at the system level Level 2 the individual control units are displayed and at the control unit level Level 3 the individual lights are displayed Recording the last event A Alongside the display of the recording of the last event there is an icon 2 The logo changes according to the type of event A red triangle 3 indicates the recording of an error event which has not yet been acknowledged In this case DARDO PLUS PC LITE also emits a regular sound if the setting is active EN 8 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric o Date and time of last acquisition 4 Complete path of the control unit name from which data is being acquired 5 Status of th
7. e Gront om indikeringarna p displayen inte visar n gra oregelbudenheter e Rott om det forekommer oregelbudenheter typ kommunikationsfel utility status vilostatus fel nodl ge tesblockering eller kortslutning p lampkontrollkretsen o Gult i motsatt fall Test p g r 3 R tt test p g r Gr nt ingen test Delta 4 R tt om skilnaden i datum och tid mellan dator och styrenhet har verskridit parameterinst llningarna Gr nt i motsatt fall Parametern Delta anger om styrenheternas datum och tid st mmer eller inte med programmets inst llningar Kommandon F ljande kommandon finns tillg ngliga F rv rv 1 startar en f rv rvcykel p styrenheten e Stall in datum och tid 2 datum och tid som datorn skickat till styrenheten Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider SV 21 Electric Controls on control unit 2 Set date and time Allmanna egenskaper DARDO PLUS RM 1 General Status Test Mame Dardo Plus 1 5 Address Acquisition cycles 111 E Motes Es SV 22 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Om du markerar l get 1 kan du tilldela ett namn till styrenheten Om du markerar laget 2 kan operatoren andra forvarvfrekvensen for den Overvakade styrenheten Parametern forv rvcykler ar fran b rjan inst lld p v rdet 1 Den har parametern anger hur ofta styrenheten forvarvar data under forvarvcyklerna V rdet 1 anger att man forvarvar data fran styrenhet
8. e New 1 e Delete 2 e Properties 3 e Start acquisition 4 e Stop acquisition 5 e Exit 6 e Restore Database 7 e Backup Database 8 e Compaction Icon 9 inserts a new system or control unit on the screen The type of object inserted depends on the current level deletes the object selected on the screen displays the properties of the object selected on the screen starts data acquisition stops data acquisition All pending commands on the control units are cancelled used to exit from the program having first stopped acquisition loads the last copy of the database from the tempbck subfolder in the installation directory Press the button to close the program so that the data will be loaded at the next startup restart the program as described and enter the password saves a copy of the database at the moment it is pressed The copy is saved in the tempbck subfolder in the installation directory and the file is called dardoLite mdb When the program is running a backup copy of the database is automatically made every hour icon not normally visible It appears when the database becomes larger than 5 MByte and compaction has not been done for more than 1 week Compaction is performed with a single click Press the button to close the program to allow the program to be disconnected from the database restart the program as described and enter the password Dardo Plus PC LITE
9. possibile alloperatore cambiare la frequenza di acquisizione della centralina supervisionata Il parametro cicli di acquisizione impostato inizialmente sul valore 1 Questo parametro indica la frequenza di acquisizione dati della centralina relativamente ai cicli di acquisizione Il valore 1 indica che viene eseguita l acquisizione dei dati della centralina ogni volta che viene eseguito un ciclo di acquisizione ll valore 2 indica che viene eseguita l acquisizione dei dati della centralina ogni due cicli di acquisizione Il valore O indica che non viene mai eseguita l acquisizione dei dati della centralina Selezionando nel punto 3 possibile avere un campo note di descrizione arbitrario per l operatore Selezionando nel punto 4 possibile all operatore cambiare l indirizzo della centralina supervisionata dg Schneider BP Electric Dardo Plus PC LITE Stato e Inibizione 1 e Test Funzionale 2 e Test di autonomia pari 3 test di autonomia e funzionali sia a calendario che manuali sono inibiti Le lampade collegate che si trovano nelle condizione di poter accettare il comando sono in Test Funzionale Le lampade pari collegate che si trovano nelle condizione di poter accettare il comando sono in Test di autonomia DARDO PLUS 1 Eg Shorteye e Test di autonomia dispari 4 e Rest mode 5 e Restore 6 e Utility 7 e Corto circuito linea Dardo eye 8 e Anomalia 9 e Em
10. zen z znam log Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 39 Electric Event log Date System M Cont Lil Lon LamDP Name Description O 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERWER First M LOBO Lamprequired O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVER First M A Jlamprequied O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVERT First ON Jlamprequied O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERVER First ii Jlamprequied Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVER First II Jlamprequied Detault dministator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVERI First ON L mprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 24 SERVER First II D Jlamprequied Default inistrator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First ON BB L mprequired Default inistrator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First II Pi Jlamprequied Deiadbdntrtialo 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First M BY Lampreguied Detault dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 23 SERVER First ON BB Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First O A lampreguied Detault dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVERI First mi D Lamprequied Default dministrahor 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVERI First mi meet Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 23 SERVER First II PU Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 06 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First Mf BO Jlamprequied Deiadbbdntrtiso 91 08 2007 9 03 21 SE
11. A aplicac o permite ao utilizador gerir controlar e programar o funcionamento dos dispositivos indicados O programa permite representar o layout de posicionamento das l mpadas e das centrais hierarquicamente para agilizar a identificac o do ponto no qual as anomalias surgem O utilizador pode gerir controlar e programar o funcionamento de cada Central DARDO PLUS A aplicac o fornece uma vis o do estado de cada sistema e de todas as l mpadas geridas A aplicac o mostra e memoriza num arquivo hist rico os alarmes e as anomalias detectadas pelo sistema Com DARDO PLUS PC LITE poss vel programar a periodicidade dos Testes de Funcionamento e de Autonomia das centrais e executar os comandos interactivos oferecendo as mesmas func es presentes nos pain is das centrais Os resultados dos testes e as eventuais anomalias dos sistemas verificados s o registados pelo programa DARDO PLUS PC LITE permitindo ao operador realizar pesquisas e impress es dos eventos memorizados A aplicac o fornece uma vis o do estado de cada sistema e de todas as l mpadas geridas A aplicac o mostra e memoriza num arquivo hist rico os alarmes e as anomalias detectadas pelo sistema Import ncia do manual Este manual de instru es cont m informa es necess rias ao uso do produto proibida a reprodu o e a transmissao parcial ou integral do manual a terceiros sem a autorizac o escrita da SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC A SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC reserva se o dire
12. Eliminac o da Porta de comunicac o Com este comando poss vel eliminar caso n o haja nehuma instalac o conectada uma das portas de comunicac o definidas no programa DARDO PLUS PC LITE Remove communications port EN Choose Com Port to Remove Cancel Remove Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider d Electric Instalac o Inserc o da Instalac o Depois de ter definido qual porta de comunicac o usar para a instalac o e as caracter sticas que ela deve ter poss vel inserir a instalac o e comecar a definir suas caracter sticas Na janela mostrada na tela Input window presente a lista das portas de comunicac o entre as quais poss vel escolher aquela a usar Na lista h tamb m a porta seleccionada antes ao definir uma nova porta de comunicac o aquela deve ser a escolhida Input window ES Insert system Mame Newblame Choose a Port W Enable acquisition Description e Internal Contacte External Contacts Posicionando se no nivel Instalagao e clicando no fundo com o botao direito do mouse selecciona se Inserir instala o Insert system abre se a janela que pede a defini o da porta de comunica o e todas as descric es necess rias para tornar a instalac o un voca e Inserir ol nome da instalac o no espaco de texto denominado Nome Name e Escolher uma porta de comunica o ainda n o usada entre as listadas na janela de di logo Escolher uma porta Choose
13. He U KRIER Time of test 00 00 00 00 start day and month 01401 WEIEN Restore is accepted if the control unit is not in disabled status REST or UTILITY mode there is no short circuit on the light control line Function Test is not accepted if e disabled status active function test in progress odd or even numbered autonomy test in progress Short circuit on the light control line Even numbered lights Autonomy Test odd numbered lights Autonomy Test is not accepted if Charging not complete on lights 24h disabled status active function test in progress odd or even numbered autonomy test in progress Short circuit on the light control line Rest is accepted if in emergency and no Eye short circuit Dardo Plus PC LITE EN 17 Schneider General Properties DARDO PLUS 1 General Status Test Name Dardo Plus 1 es Address Acquisition cycles a C1 Notes Select from point 1 to allocate a name to the control unit Select from point 2 to allow the operator to change the acquisition frequency of the control unit under supervision The acquisition cycles parameter is set initially on value 1 This parameter indicates the frequency of data acquisition from the control unit with regard to acquisition cycles Value 1 indicates that data acquisition from the control unit is performed every time an acquisition cycle is executed Value 2 ind
14. Schneider UNIDADE DE CONTROLO DARDO PLUS Controlo lampadas auto alimentadas UNIDADE DE CONTROLO DARDO PLUS uma central habilitada para a supervis o de l mpadas auto alimentadas na qual poss vel programar os testes de funcionamento e os testes de autonomia configurando data hora e periodicidade dos mesmos Nesta central poss vel enviar comandos interactivos Para inserir a central clicar no fundo e seleccionar Inserir central Abre se a janela que permite escolher o tipo de aparato a inserir na instalac o Depois de ter feito a selecc o e definido o endereco da central confirmar a inserc o premendo o bot o OK No fundo aparece o sin ptico 3 correspondente a central seleccionada Sin ptico DP 1 Broken CI States Test in progress Delta A central tem as seguintes indicac es danificadas broken 1 Verde se n o h l mpadas danificadas o Amarelo se h um n mero de l mpadas danificadas inferior ao limite definido nos par metros Vermelho se h um n mero de l mpadas danificadas superior ao limite definido nos par metros Estados States 2 Verde se as indica es do display n o apresentam situa es de anomalia o Vermelho se n o houver condi es de anomalia como erros de comunica o estado de servi o utility estado de repouso rest anomalia emerg ncia Testes inibidos curto circuito na linha de controlo das l mpadas o Amarelo nos
15. dans le menu qui s ouvre DP 1 S Broken ke sales Commands Test in progress Open Control Unit Remove Control Unit Properties FR 34 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Une fen tre s affiche o il faut s lectionner la rubrigue Acquisition et la lancer en appuyant sur le bouton Enter retour 3 Controls on control unit 1 Acquisition Acquisition Inhibit test Disable inhibit Restore Functional tests Even lamps autonomy test Odd lamps autonomy test Rest Test duration in minutes 3 O Time of test 00 00 00 00 start day and month 01701 01 01 008 Il faut choisir la commande lancer dans la liste des commandes 4 Lampes Indication sur les synoptiques des lampes Pour visualiser l tat des lampes associ es un poste d termin il faut s lectionner le poste et lancer l acquisition des donn es l aide de la commande pr vue cet effet Une fois l acquisition termin e toutes les lampes sont visualis es a laide de synoptiques ou il est possible de voir la num rotation d enregistrement et en cas de postes le num ro de ligne 1 ou 2 et le nombre de lampes de la ligne La couleur d pend de l tat enregistr par le poste apres un test de fonctionnement ou d autonomie Le synoptique peut afficher des d tails suppl mentaires suffit de s lectionner avec le bouton droit de la souris la fonction Propri t s qui fait appara tre une f
16. 2 gt Admin ATTENTION mi IL EST CONSEILL DE MODIFIER LE MOT DE PASSE DES LE PREMIER ACCES AU SYST ME La configuration initiale d crite permet d acc der en tant gu administrateur avec toutes les autorisations possibles pour g rer le programme proprement dit Si rien n est s lectionn le programme d marre automatiquement au bout de quelques secondes avec le profil d utilisateur g n rique Les options de configuration permettent de configurer le temps d attente 3 avant que le programme ne d marre automatiquement Les caract ristigues des deux niveaux utilisateur sont les suivantes Administrateurs Il est possible de visualiser toutes les donn es du programme et d acc der aux configurations et aux commandes il est aussi possible de lancer et de terminer un cycle d acquisition L administrateur peut effectuer toutes les op rations et plus particuli rement il peut modifier les caract ristigues des objets des niveaux et aussi d finir de nouveaux utilisateurs Invites Il est possible de visualiser toutes les donn es du programme de lancer et d arr ter le cycle d acquisition Si les donn es entr es pendant l installation sont incorrectes une fen tre s affiche lors du d marrage du programme o il est demand d entrer de nouveau les codes d activation du logiciel Dardo Plus PC LITE FR 5 Schneider Ex Customer client code 1 1SSS code 2
17. 21208 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M D Lamprequired Default amp dministrator 312082007 9 03 20 SERVER First mM B Lamprequired _ o Default amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M o O J Sa Lamprequired O Default amp dministrator 314082007 9 03 20 SERVERI Fist Ot B Lamp regured O Defaul amp dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M o D i Lamprequiredo _ Default amp dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERWER Fist M E Lamp regured O Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M arp required _ Default amp dministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M Lamp required Default dministrator EE U e DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 8 53 46 Default amp dministrator Control unit route LEVEL SERVER First FloorDardo Plus 1 Number of records 52 10 Number of events 1 displays the number of events in the log table Backup Button 2 saves a copy of the content of the log table displayed at the time it is pressed The copy of the content is saved in the folder named with the program name The file is called log txt The fields are separated by in a format which can also be used with MS Excel Use the Delete button 3 to delete all the logs displayed Move the mouse over the logs message lines and press CTRL to widen the number of fields selected To delete all the records without
18. Level Names Log MW Do not end application after cycle number Wal after control in seconds 30 Delay between two acquisitions in tenths of a second g Acquistion timer period m 1000 Cancel SV 28 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Niv namn Namnet du vill anv nda f r den f rsta niv n tex L n Fr n andra niv och fram t r niv namn forbestamda eftersom de motsvarar anl ggningens struktur V ljer du standardrutorna anv nds namnen Niv 1 och Niv 2 Dardo Parameters Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings TimeDut Duration Level Names Log Use default for Server Mew name for Server Server Logg Har kan du konfigurera antalet poster som ska ing i arkivet Handelselogg Signaleringar 1 Om du bockar for Beep avges en ljudsignal vid varje registrering den har parametern ar valfri 2 Dardo Parameters X Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings TimeOut Duration Level Hames Lag Maximum number of log 2000 1 1 Beep 2 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider SV 29 Electric Forvarvforsok Antalet uppkopplingsforsok till anl ggningarna som DARDO PLUS PC LITE utfor for att kunna forvarva data innan det signalerar ett kommunikaitonsfel Installningsomradet ar 6 20 Dardo Parameters TimeOut Duration Level Names Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings Current value
19. Threshold Delta Settings TimeOut Duration Level Names Current timeout value in seconds 45 Mew timeout value in seconds 45 Ez ES Parametr kter je t eba nakonfigurovat a kter ur uje dobu ek n v sekund ch ne se v p pad nezad n hesla do vstupn ho okna program spust automaticky Automatick vstup se provede pod profilem host Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 27 Electric Doba trv n Tento parametr slou k nastaven e sekund doby ek n po odesl n ur it ho p kazu ne budou pokra ovat dal operace 1 e desetin sekundy doby ek n mezi dv ma cykly sb ru dat 2 e tis cin sekundy doby ek n vnit n ho timeru motoru sb ru dat p i p echodu dotazov n z jedn d c jednotky na druhou 3 Dardo Parameters E Threshold Delta Settings Acquisition attempts Y Duration Level Mames Log TimeOut MW Do not end application after cycle number Wal after control in seconds 30 Delay between two acquisitions in tenths of a second g Acquistion timer period m 1000 Cancel CS 28 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric N zvy rovn N zev kter chcete pou t pro prvn rove nap okres Od druh rovn d le jsou n zvy rovn ji p edur eny nebo odpov daj struktu e syst mu Zvol te li defaultn ok nka budou pou it
20. attiva IT 8 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric o Data e ora dell ultima acquisizione 4 Percorso completo del nome della centralina da cui si stanno acquisendo i dati 5 Stato della acquisizione B e 6 Licona visualizza un orologio quando l acquisizione esegue un ciclo di attesa della interrogazione e 7 L icona visualizza una lampadina e il gruppo di lampade quando acquisisce lo stato delle lampade e 8 Licona visualizza un cerchio rosso quando acquisisce lo stato della centralina e 9 L icona visualizza una mano che preme un tasto quando DARDO PLUS PC LITE invia un comando alla centralina Porta di comunicazione C e Icona comunicazione diretta in seriale RS485 icona che sintetizza i cavi di collegamento seriale 10 Icona acquisizione attiva 12 il led verde se l acquisizione e attiva rosso nel caso l acquisizione sia spenta Casella che indica lo stato delle acquisizioni 13 Nel caso in cui il ciclo di acquisizione sia attivato dal pulsante Avvia acquisizione presente sulla finestra principale lo stato di avanzamento del ciclo verificabile dall avanzamento dei quadratini blu che compongono la barra l avanzamento dei quadratini blu proporzionale all avanzamento del ciclo di acquisizione Quando il ciclo di acquisizione completato la barra piena di quadratini blu e si ha l aggiornamento dei dati disponibili L acquisizione continua ciclicamente fino a quando
21. jednotky e 9 Ikona zobrazuje ruku kter tiskne tla tko jestli e DARDO PLUS PC LITE odes l p kaz d c jednotce Komunika n port C e lkona p m komunikace s riov ho p ipojen RS485 ikona kter sch maticky zobrazuje kabely s riov ho p ipojen 10 Ikona aktivn ho sb ru dat 12 pokud je sb r dat aktivn kontrolka je zelen pokud je vypnut kontrolka je erven Ok nko kter ozna uje stav sb ru dat 13 Pokud byl cyklus sb ru dat spu t n tla tkem Spustit sb r dat z hlavn ho okna jeho stav je mo n kontrolovat podle postupu modr ch tvere k kter tvo li tu Postup modr ch tvere k je propor n k postupu cyklu sb ru dat Po ukon en cyklu sb ru dat je li ta zapln na modr mi tvere ky a provede se aktualizace dat k dispozici Sb r dat pot pokra uje cyklicky dokud nestisknete tla tko STOP Jestli e komunikace nen aktivn li ta je ed a modr tvere ky nejsou p tomny Pokud cyklus sb ru dat nebyl spu t n tla tkem Spustit sb r dat ale p mo z d c jednotky modr tvere ky ozna en stavu postupu cyklu se na li t neobjev Ok nko v n m se zobraz zak dovan popis komunika n ch aktivit v angli tin 14 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 9 Electric Opu t n programu Menu Soubor obsahuje podmenu Vyj t kter umo uje opustit program DARDO PLUS PC LITE P
22. v nements sauvegarder d finissant l espace disponible est tabli par l utilisateur dans le menu Modify parameters modifier les param tres Avant la fermeture du programme une fen tre appara t si l utilisateur r pond oui la question qui y est contenue une copie de la base de donn es est sauvegard e dans un dossier avec un num ro correspondant au jour de la semaine Le fichier s appelle dardoLite mdb Il est possible d effectuer la m me op ration de sauvegarde de la base de donn es avec le bouton Backup database sauvegarde de la base de donn es Les v nements enregistr s sont li s au fonctionnement du programme par exemple e L ouverture ou la fermeture du programme e L tat de la communication e Un changement d tat des postes ou des lampes Les signalisations sont soit des erreurs soit des avertissements Pour ouvrir la fen tre de gestion des v nements il suffit de double cliguer sur la barre 1 d affichage de la derni re erreur ou du dernier avertissement situ e en bas de l cran EZ Cette page permet d effectuer des recherches et d imprimer des enregistrements Lorsgu un v nement est relev le programme signale l enregistrement et met un bip p riodique configurable comme option dans le menu Options Param tres Journal Outre ce signal sonore un triangle rouge apparait sur la ligne de la case Journal v nements Ce signal continue jusqu a ce qu un op ra
23. 51 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERI First ON 2 pred Delauk dministratar 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M 2 Lampreguied O 1 Defaul amp dministatoo 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERI First ON amp required DefaultAdministrater AA as a 3108 2007 9 03 18 SERVERT First O efault dministrator 317082007 3 03 18 SERVERI Pal of 31 0872007 8 5346 D 31 08 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M Di DefaultAdministratar D a i Login Default amp dministrator Default amp dministrator Control unit route LEVEL SERVER First FloorDardo Plus 1 Number of records peso C vm EEE From left to right the columns contain the following data Date and time the event was recorded using the control panel short date format System name 3 Not used 4 Control unit address 5 Not used 6 Not used 7 Dardo light number plus Control Unit 8 Name of the light 9 Event description 10 User who recorded the event 11 EN 40 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Event Log and Search window buttons Use the buttons in the lower part of the window to manage all the events recorded in the database and displayed in the window Event log Xx Date System MI Cont D Lan LamDP Name Description JUser 31082007 9 03 26 SERVER First MO oo o J Lamprequired Default dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 26 SERVER First M 4 Lamprequ
24. FR 22 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider La s lection du point 1 permet d attribuer un nom au poste La s lection du point 2 donne la possibilit l op rateur de changer la fr quence d acquisition du poste surveill Le param tre Acquisition cycles cycles d acquisition est configur initialement sur la valeur 1 Ce param tre indique la fr guence d acquisition des donn es du poste relativement aux cycles d acquisition La valeur 1 indique que acquisition des donn es du poste a lieu chaque fois qu un cycle d acquisition est effectu La valeur 2 indique que l acquisition des donn es du poste a lieu tous les deux cycles d acquisition La valeur 0 indique que l acquisition des donn es du poste na jamais lieu En s lectionnant le point 3 il est possible d avoir un champ o l op rateur peut entrer des notes La s lection du point 4 donne la possibilit a l op rateur de changer l adresse du poste surveill tat DARDO PLUS RM 1 General Status Test Inhibition Test Restore F Utility Short eye Faut Emergency Communication Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider FR 23 d Electric FR 24 Inhibition 1 Test 2 Restauration 3 Utilitaire 4 Court circuit ligne Dardo eye 5 D faillance 6 tat de secours 7 Comunicat
25. General Contacts General Contacts i Internal Contacts Eme Echneider E Reel 02 07 2008 9 25 28 Connection Serial port i i o 120E72 C0M1 O Acquire a o Acquisition Enabled Description Change Contacts Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider IT 13 Electric Inserimento Centraline Dopo avere inserito l impianto definito il tipo di comunicazione ed alcune caratteristiche possibile inserire le centraline necessario istruire il programma e metterlo in condizione di vedere ed identificare le centraline Nella finestra che compare a video presente l elenco delle tipologie di centraline selezionabili in cui scegliere quelle utilizzate per comporre l impianto Insert control unit Control unit type DARDO PLUS Control unit name Dardo Plus 1 1 Address Posizionandosi al livello Gruppo centraline che si visualizza aprendo l impianto o premendo la freccia avanti freccia a destra descritta nel paragrafo Pulsanti di comando cliccando sullo sfondo con il pulsante destro del mouse si pu selezionare Inserisci centralina si apre la finestra che permette la scelta del tipo di apparato da inserire nell impianto 1 Le tipologie di apparati selezionabili sono centraline della famiglia Dardo Dopo avere eseguito la selezione necessario definire l indirizzo 2 della centralina prima di confermarne l ins
26. Lamprequired Default dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 26 SERVER Fist M A Lamprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERVER Fist M 8 tru _ Default amp dministrator 31708 2007 9 03 26 SERVERI Fist mM Z L mprequired Diefault dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 26 SERVER Fist M A Lamprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist M sni DefaulkAdministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist M D true Default amp dministrator 312082007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist TI DM oo BR ned Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist M o J Di Lamprequired Default dministratar 31 06 2007 9 03 24 SERVERI First M B Lamprequired O _ Defaul amp dministrator 3108 2007 9 03 23 SERVER Fist M D Lamprequired Default dministratar 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERWER First MJ o o D Lampreqguired O Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First M B Lamprequired Default dministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First M EE Lamprequired O Default amp dministrator 3108 2007 9 03 23 SERVER Fist M Di Lampreguied Defaults dirinistratnr _ 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M D tru Default amp dministrator 3109 2007 9 03 21 SERVERI First MoO S Lampreguiied Defaulk amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M o o S O tru Defa
27. d fectueux 1 Couleur verte s il ny a aucune lampe d fectueuse Couleur jaune si le nombre de lampes d fectueuses est inf rieur au seuil param tr Couleur rouge si le nombre de lampes d fectueuses est sup rieur au seuil param tr tats 2 Couleur verte lorsque l afficheur ne pr sente aucune situation de d faillance e Couleur rouge lorsque des d faillances surviennent erreurs de communication tat d utilitaire tat de repos d faillance tat de secours inhibition tests court circuit sur la ligne de contr le des lampes o Couleur jaune dans le cas contraire Test en cours 3 o Couleur rouge test en cours Couleur verte aucun test Diff rence 4 Couleur rouge lorsque le d phasage de date et heure entre le PC et le poste d passe la valeur param tr e o Couleur verte dans le cas contraire Le parametre Delta diff rence indique si les dates et l heure des postes correspondent ou non aux configurations du programme Commandes Les commandes suivantes sont disponibles Acquisition 1 lance le cycle d acquisition du poste o Configurer date et heure 2 date et heure du PC envoy s au poste Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider FR 21 TP Electric Controls on control unit 2 Set date and time Propri t s g n rales DARDO PLUS RM 1 General Status Test Mame Dardo Plus 1 5 Address Acquisition cycles LI DL Notes Es
28. gerarchicamente in modo da rendere veloce l identificazione del punto in cui le anomalie insorgono L utente pu gestire controllare e programmare il funzionamento delle singole Centraline DARDO PLUS L applicazione fornisce una visione dello stato di ogni sistema e di tutte le lampade gestite L applicazione visualizza e memorizza in un archivio storico gli allarmi e le anomalie rilevate dal sistema Con DARDO PLUS PC LITE possibile programmare la periodicit dei Test Funzionali e dei Test di Autonomia delle centraline ed eseguire comandi interattivi offrendo le stesse funzionalit presenti nei pannelli delle centraline risultati dei test e le eventuali anomalie dei sistemi controllati sono registrati dal programma DARDO PLUS PC LITE permettendo all operatore di eseguire ricerche e stampe degli eventi acquisiti L applicazione fornisce una visione dello stato di ogni sistema e di tutte le lampade gestite L applicazione visualizza e memorizza in un archivio storico gli allarmi e le anomalie rilevate dal sistema Importanza del manuale Il presente manuale istruzioni contiene le informazioni necessarie all uso del prodotto E vietata la riproduzione e la trasmissione a terzi di tutto o parti del presente manuale senza l autorizzazione scritta di SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC si riserva il diritto di effettuare modifiche senza alcun preavviso allo scopo di migliorare i propri prodotti In conseguenza di ci potrebbe verificarsi la
29. gio interno do PC e o interno da Central em minutos Dardo Parameters TimeQut Duration Level Names Log Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings Maximum delta of counters in minutes Current value 10 Mew value 10 a Definic es Settings Ao seleccionar o quadrado Tooltip immagini poss vel associar uma imagem gr fica a cada objecto central ou l mpada Dardo Parameters TimeOut Duration Level Names Log Acquisition attempts Threshold Celta Settings Iw Tooltip images Server Dardo Plus PC LITE PT 31 Schneider DP 1 Exemplo de posicionamento do cursor broken pr ximo ao icone DARDO PLUS DO States Test in progress Exemplo de E posicionamento A al x ll do cursor pr ximo ao cone da l mpada seleccionada ver a borda azul destacada Para associar uma imagem a uma l mpada necess rio 1 2 3 PT 32 posicionar o cursor no sin ptico da lampada clicar nele para que apareca o menu Propriedades clicar no menu para que apareca a janela Propriedades L mpada Plant Scheneider 1 Clicar no menu Propriedades equivale a premer o bot o Propriedades presente na janela principal e descrito no par grafo Bot es de comando Na janela Propriedades L mpada seleccionar a pasta Geral General 2 Ao clicar na tecla 3 do item Famiglia Family aparece a janela Muda Familia Ch
30. r dat zobrazovat ji vlo en pozn mky a uzn vat ud losti File Configuration T agree gt E Y Options List of authorizations Change password Pomoc tohoto menu je mo n prov d t v echny operace t kaj c se u ivatel maj c ch povolen ke vstupu do programu Menu Povolen obsahuje dv podmenu o Seznam povolen 1 Zm na hesla 2 Seznam povolen User Permits username ea eegen EE J Guest Generic Guest Administrator Manager Remove Modification Toto okno se zobraz v p pad budete li cht t vlo it nov ho u ivatele 1 odstranit jej 2 nebo m nit 3 seznam u ivatel kte maj povolen k u v n DARDO PLUS PC LITE Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 25 d Electric Vlo en nov ho u ivatele User Permits E 1 User 01 8 Guest Generic Guest ES User 02 Administrator Manager New Permit E User name Password Contirm password Administrator Description ME Remove Modification uit Do okna Nov povolen je t eba vlo it informace kter vypln t i sloupky seznamu Povolen pro u ivatele e Jm no u ivatele 4 e Urove neboli zda se jedn o spr vce i obecn ho u ivatele 5 e Popis poskytnut v okam iku nadefinov n u ivatele 6 Pot co spr vce vytvo sv j vlastn profil s p slu n m heslem 7 a profil obecn ch u ivatel ka d u ivatel bude muset p ed vs
31. s d intervention limit es il peut lancer et arr ter l acquisition des donn es visualiser les notes d ja entr es et identifier les v nements File Configuration Aia Options Gr ce a ce menu les utilisateurs autoris s acc der au programme peuvent effectuer toutes les op rations de gestion Le menu Authorizations Autorisations contient deux sous menus e Liste des autorisations 1 Modifier le mot de passe 2 Liste des autorisations User Permits username evel dem EE J Generic Guest Administrator Manager Remove Modification La fen tre apparait si Ion souhaite entrer un nouvel utilisateur 1 supprimer 2 ou modifier 3 la liste des utilisateurs autoris s a acc der au programme DARDO PLUS PC LITE Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider FR 25 Electric Entr e d un nouvel utilisateur User Permits E 1 User 01 8 Guest Generic Guest ES User 02 Administrator Manager New Permit E User name Password Contirm password Administrator Description ME Remove Modification uit Il est n cessaire dentrer dans la fen tre New permit nouvelle autorisation les informations qui figureront ensuite dans les trois colonnes de la liste User permits autorisations utilisateurs e Nom utilisateur 4 Niveau administrateur ou utilisateur g n rique 5 Description fournie au moment de la definition de l utilisateur 6 Apr s que l administrateur a
32. s le prochain d marrage red marrer le programme comme indiqu et entrer le mot de passe e Bouton Sauvegarde base de donn es 8 Presser ce bouton pour sauvegarder une copie de la base de donn es La copie est sauvegard e dans le sous dossier tempbck du r pertoire d installation et le fichier s appelle dardoLite mdb Lorsque le programme est ouvert une copie de sauvegarde de la base de donn es est effectu e automatiquement toutes les heures e ic ne Compacter 9 Ic ne normalement non visible Appara t quand la base de donn es d passe 5Mo et que le compactage n a pas t effectu depuis plus d une semaine Le compactage seffectue d un seul clic L activation de ce bouton provoque la fermeture du programme lequel peut ainsi se d connecter de la base de donn es red marrer le programme comme indiqu et entrer le mot de passe Dardo Plus PC LITE FR 7 Schneider ATTENTION LE BOUTON RESTAURATION DE LA BASE DE DONN ES REMPLACE LA BASE DE DONN ES EN COURS D UTILISATION PAR LA DERNIERE COPIE EFFECTU E CECI d IMPLIQUE LA PERTE DES MODIFICATIONS VENTUELLEMENT APPORT ES ENTRE LE MOMENT OU LA COPIE A T R ALIS E ET CELUI OU ELLE EST CHARG E 9 e DIO d O Boutons de niveau e Bouton 10 Permet de visualiser le niveau syst me e Bouton 11 Permet de visualiser le niveau poste e Bouton 12 Permet de visualiser le niveau suivant Les boutons ne sont activ s que si un o
33. tisknout za sebou na v ce dek jedn str nky Ok nko dky tisku pro dky dat poskytuje po et nutn ch str nek dek 17 a procentn zapln n str nky 18 Kontroln ok nko Grafick tisk 19 je t eba zvolit pokud budete pou vat laserov nebo inkoustov tisk rny Tato funkce vytvo tisk lep kvality s d l c mi rami a r me ky kolem n zv s ed m pozad m U jehli kov ch tisk ren tato volba znamen velmi dlouh ek n Seznam volby mezi dky 20 umo uje zvolit vzd lenost mezi dv ma dkami dat Tato vz lenost m e b t zru ena nastavena na v ku poloviny znaku nebo cel ho znaku V doln sti okna se zobrazuje nastaven znaku tisku Tla tko Znak 21 umo uje zvolit druh styl a rozm r znaku Pou ijete li znak se symbolem tisk rny tisk m e b t rychlej hlavn u jehli kov ch tisk ren Je mo n znovu otev t okno a zvolit tisk rnu 22 D t p kaz k proveden tisku 23 nebo opustit okno tisku bez proveden jak hokoliv p kazu 24 i UPOZORN N US ZNAKY TISK RNY KTER SE ZOBRAZUJ JSOU ZNAKY T TISK RNY KTER BYLA ZVOLENA JAKO P EDNOSTN NA OVL DAC M PANELU CS 42 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric Tla tko Vyhled v n 6 umo uje zvolit podskupinu ud lost mezi t mi kter se zobrazuj na m ce z znam 25 Log search System SER VERT First Floor 01 d F Ev
34. 2006 06 001 2006 oO 2008 UO 2006 09 01 2006 10401 2006 11 01 2006 12 01 2006 13401 2006 19 01 2006 15 01 2006 General Status Test Functional tests Operating time test OFA 22007 8 00 00 144 22007 3 00 00 2142 2007 6 00 00 20 1 22007 3 00 00 04 01 2006 9 00 00 11 01 2006 5 00 00 13 01 2006 5 00 00 5001 2006 5 00 00 01 02 2006 9 00 00 08 02 2006 5 00 00 15 02 2006 5 00 00 2202 2006 9 00 00 29 02 2008 3 00 00 0705 2006 6 00 00 Schneider Electric Dardo Plus PC LITE DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM Fjarrstyrd kontroll sjalvmatade lampor DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM ar en styrenhet f r Overvakning av sjalvmatade lampor med programmering av funktions och brinntidstester samt tillh rande datum tid och periodicitet Den har styrenheten ar mottaglig for interaktiva kommandon Klickar du p bakgrunden markeras Infoga styrenhet och ett fonster dar du kan valja vilken typ av apparat som ska infogas anlaggningen dyker upp Efter valet m ste man definiera styrenhetens adress och sedan bekr fta tg rden med knappen OK Pa bakgrunden visas ett symbolschema av vald styrenhet Symbolschema DP DM 3 3 Broken CI States O Test in progress Delta Styrenheten har foljande indikeringar defekta 1 Gr nt om det inte finns n gra defekta lampor Gult om antalet defekta lampor ligger under tr skeln R tt om antalet defekta lampor ligger ver tr skeln Status 2
35. 23 SERVER First M B Lamprequired Default dministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First M EE Lamprequired O Default amp dministrator 3108 2007 9 03 23 SERVER Fist M Di Lampreguied Defaults dirinistratnr _ 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M D tru Default amp dministrator 3109 2007 9 03 21 SERVERI First MoO S Lampreguiied Defaulk amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M o o S O tru Default amp dministrator 31708 2007 9 03 21 SERVERI First mM LLemprened o o Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M D Lamprequired Default amp dministrator 312082007 9 03 20 SERVER First mM B Lamprequired _ o Default amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M o O J Sa Lamprequired O Default amp dministrator 314082007 9 03 20 SERVERI Fist Ot B Lamp regured O Defaul amp dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M o D i Lamprequiredo _ Default amp dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERWER Fist M E Lamp regured O Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M arp required _ Default amp dministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M Lamp required Default dministrator EE U e DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 8 53 46 Default amp dministrator Control unit route LEVEL SERVER First FloorDardo Plus 1 Number
36. A C PIA E O MOMENTO EM OUE ELA CARREGADA SER O PERDIDAS 9 e DIO d O Bot es de n vel e Bot o 10 permite ver o nivel da instala o e Bot o 11 permite ver o nivel da central e Bot o 12 permite ver o pr ximo n vel As teclas s o activas somente se foi inserido pelo menos um objecto do n vel em que se est Quadros de estado System level System Level Level Tem ame D ardo Plus 1 III Os guadros de estado s o os seguintes Nivel 1 Indica o nivel visualizado Se estamos no Nivel 1 sao visualizadas as instalac es no nivel instalac o N vel 2 visualizada cada central no n vel central N vel 3 visualizada cada l mpada Registo do ltimo evento A Ao lado da visualizac o do registo do ltimo evento presente um icone 2 O s mbolo muda de acordo com o evento se o icone for um tri ngulo vermelho 3 sinaliza que foi registado um evento de erro ainda n o reconhecido Neste caso o DARDO PLUS PC LITE emite periodicamente tamb m um sinal sonoro se esta definic o estiver activa PT 8 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Data e hora da ltima aguisic o 4 Percurso completo do nome da central da qual est o sendo adquiridos os dados 5 Estado da aguisic o B e 6 O icone mostra um rel gio quando a aquisi o est a executar um ciclo de espera da interroga o e 7 O cone mostra uma luzinha e o grupo de l mpa
37. Al permette di selezionare i record di un periodo 32 Messaggio permette di selezionare i record aventi una stessa descrizione 33 Note permette di selezionare i record cui associata una nota 34 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider IT 43 BP Electric Contents INTOdUCUON EE 1 About this Instruction MANUAl mirra 1 Who this manual addresses z ssbebiaza ebanka ra in sure 1 Importance of the manual KRK RK RKA RR RR KKR KRK RR KRKA RAL 1 Keeping the manual in a safe place 1 gt YMDOIS USC ss 2 WNS a E EEEE 2 Package contents usoud ada 3 Genc CIR Tu e MANON dere n m aa ata i dana das 4 Organisation OI CC CT 4 System Management ssp iia 4 USING Me SoltWal iia d nana du KUN U KEE AU aha 5 PSS AUDE ee nn nn han nn none 5 Main WINDOW zari iia 6 EXILU IOM DLOOTAN icccsce esas ercesenseacescsewseuncwenssustesssteseeesnesunaessaeses 10 Operating le Ve 5m ici ta m n 6 o a 10 SOMMUNICAION POTIS ansiosas ds DD ace nis none 10 Inserting a new communication DOT unner KK KR KEE KEE KREE KEE KREE ne 11 Removing a communication port see ke KEE KREE KREE KEE KREE KEE KEE Kee 11 SY STC cri 12 INSEMING a gt SOM es 12 inserting Control UNS aii 14 Types of control unit managed lt ccc lt cz zzz zz zz zzz KEE KEE KEE KEE KEE 15 Configuration of control unit addresses 1 sssssssiiasisazininioni 15 DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT sciare rien 16 SVNOPLIG Ev iia 16 Belle CN 16 DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM NA 21 SVNODUC PINE iri
38. Anom lie 9 e Pohotovost 10 e Komunikace 11 Dardo Plus PC LITE Jak testy autonomie a funk n testy pl novan podle kalend e tak ru n spustiteln testy jsou zablokov ny Na p ipojen ch lamp ch kter jsou ve stavu e mohou p ijmout p kaz pr v prob h funk n test Na p ipojen ch sud ch lamp ch kter jsou ve stavu Ze mohou p ijmout p kaz pr v prob h test autonomie DARDO PLUS 1 Eg General status Test 7 Inhibition Functional tests Even autonomy test Odd autonomy test Rest mode Restore Utility Short eye Faut Emergency Communication Na p ipojen ch lich ch lamp ch kter jsou ve stavu e mohou p ijmout p kaz pr v prob h TEST autonomie P ipojen lampy na nich nen p tomna s jsou ve stavu zablokovan pohotovosti P kaz Restore je aktivn d c jednotka je ve stavu Utility zablokov n pohotovosti Zkrat na komunika n lince lamp Na lamp ch p ipojen ch po FUNK N M TESTU nebo po TESTU AUTONOMIE se vyskytla anom lie N kter nebo v echny nakonfigurovan lampy sd lily d c jednotce e na nich nen p tomna dob jec s Byla zji t na chyba na s riov komunikaci Stav aktivn ho sign lu existuje tehdy jestli e je zvoleno ok nko vedle n pisu Electric e CS 19 Schneider Test Uv d napl novan data funk n ch test 1 a te
39. CO Program EE 10 Modalides de funcionamento eu Kn K E KEE KREE KE KEE KEE Ka KEE KE KEE Kee 10 FP OftasS Ce COMUNICA O ara 10 Inser o nova porta de comunica o 1 uzuzuzuzuzzzunzunnnsnnnsnnnnneaa 11 Elimina o da Porta de comunica o zzzzzzzzz z zzz zznzznnnnnnnancaao 11 STAM GG e iii 12 Insercao d INSt l G30 cir EE 12 Inser o das e d CC EC 14 Tipos de centrais geridas ss mssumemmnmnnnnenennnennnnenenenennnennnnnnnns 15 Configura o dos endere os das centrais ener KEE ENKER KEE KK KR KN 15 UNIDADE DE CONTROLO DARDO PLUS n nn 16 DINO OU CO src cerati 16 COMANDOS nn E a 16 UNIDADE DE CONTROLO RM DARDO PLUS eer ke Ke nn 21 SINODUCO iaa 21 Bei Tue Le DE 21 EGRET 25 Lista de GE TEE 25 Inser o de um Novo Utilizador ener lt nz KEE KR KEE ini 26 Nida SONDA siria 26 leie 27 AQUISI O ari 34 Lampadas aiii eo 35 Informa es das L mpadas Lamp information uumuzuzusunsnenaseas 38 A EE 39 Schneider EP Electric Premissas Esta secc o deve ser lida antes de qualquer outra documentac o e antes de iniciar qualquer tipo de operac o no produto O manual de instru es A quem destinado Este manual destinado a t cnicos de instalac o com conhecimentos adequados para operar de modo seguro em sistemas hardware e software O Software DARDO PLUS PC LITE foi pensado e desenvolvido pela SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC para estender e tornar mais flex vel o controlo das centrais da fam lia DARDO PLUS
40. Knapp 10 visar anlaggningsnivan e Knapp 11 vusar styrenhetsnivan e Knapp 12 visar nasta niva Knapparna ar aktiva bara om ett objekt infogats i den niv man befinner sig i Statusrutor 6 08 2007 11 25 25 GET LIGHT Niv 1 Anger visad niv Om du befinner dig i Niv 1 visas anl ggningarna i anl ggningsniv n Niv 2 visas de enskildastyrenheterna i styrenhetsniv n Niv 3 visas de enskilda lamporna armaturerna System Level Level 1 Mewhl ame DI ardo Plus 1 OO Rutorna inneh ller foljande sektioner Registrering av senaste handelse A Bredvid visningen av senaste h ndelsens registrering finns en ikon 2 Sj lva logot varierar beroende p typ av h ndelse om ikonen blir rod och triangelformad 3 signaleras registrering av en felhandelse som nnu inte kvitterats det fallet avger DARDO PLUS PC LITE en regelbunden ljudsignal om s dan ar inst llningen SV 8 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric o Datum och tid for senaste forvarv 4 Komplett sokvag for den styrenhet man forvarvar data ifran 5 Forvarvstatus B e 6 Ikonen visar en klocka nar f rv rvet genomg r en v ntecykel infor forfragningen e 7 Ikonen visar en lampa och tillh rande lampgrupp nar systemet h ller p och f rv rvar lampornas status e 8 Ikonen visar en r d cirkel n r styrenhetens status h ller p och f rv rvas e 9 Ikonen visar en hand som trycker
41. Nada KRKA KANA N 12 inserimento E lu E Lu de sario a 12 Inserimento Centraline sins mas maska Macon is 14 Tipi di centraline gestite ccuu cuz zzz zzz unu KEE KREE KREE KEE KEE KR KEE KN 15 Configurazione indirizzi centraline cccccocococooconoconoconanonnsnonananannana 15 DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT A 16 SINOHCO rra 16 COMANO ss A e 16 DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM o noo 21 LOT 8 D 0 d ei 0 NEE 21 CONAnNol ee riores 21 POOS S pira 25 LISTA POermesS Since 25 Inserimento Nuovo Utente z c zzz zzz KN KN ENER ENER EEE ENER ER KN KN KN KN KN KR KR V 26 Cambia PASSWOTC soria 26 OPIO Musso 27 ACQUISIZIONE id 34 LIMPIE sai 35 Informazioni aM E TEE 38 CT aasaseenses aaa a E GU RO O E 39 Schneider Electric Premesse Questa sezione deve essere letta prima di ogni altra documentazione e prima di intraprendere qualsiasi tipo di operazione sull apparecchiatura Il manuale istruzioni A chi si rivolge Questo manuale e destinato a personale installatore con conoscenze adeguate per intervenire in sicurezza su sistemi hardware e software Il Software DARDO PLUS PC LITE stato pensato e sviluppato da SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC per estendere e rendere piu flessibile il controllo delle centraline della famiglia DARDO PLUS L applicazione permette allutente di gestire controllare e programmare il funzionamento dei dispositivi indicati Il programma permette di rappresentare il layout di posizionamento delle lampade e delle centraline
42. Plus PC LITE Electric 01152 Plant Exempel p lampa kontrollerad av DARDO PLUS med brinntiden slut Dardo Plus POLE Schneider SN Electric Information om Lampor Efter att ha startat en forv rvcykel som visar symbolschemana for alla kopplade lampor bildas p avsedda lampniv en lista Over lampor som r kopplade och lampor som inte r kopplade Efter forvarvet kan hamtad information sparas p textfil acia Authorizations Options Lamp information Mew communications port Remove communications port Substituke modem Control unit route Level WY AiDardo Plus 1 Lamps inserted 41 09 01 03 gt 01 03 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 01 09 01 09 01 09 01 09 gt 01 09 01 03 gt 01 03 gt 01 03 gt 01 03 gt 01 03 gt 01 09 gt 01 OD 1 M5 nf dy FF HER Vi 1 Oh Dm O Save Tile Fonstret innehaller foljande typ av information e Lampor som systemet detekterat under uppkopplingen 1 Nummer p lampor som r tillg ngliga f r uppkopplingen 2 Alternativ som sparar p textfil alla h mtade data 3 SV 38 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Handelser Registrering av handelser Programmet registrerar alla h ndelser i en speciell databas som ar strukturerad med en sk FIFO ko detta innebar att den f rsta lampan som registreras blir den forsta som skrivs ut s fort det blir ont om plats Antalet h ndelser man vill spara som allts a
43. Saida do programa O menu Ficheiro File prev o submenu Fecha Quit que permite sair do programa DARDO PLUS PC LITE poss vel sair tamb m atrav s do Bot o Fecha Sai descrito no par grafo Bot es de comando Configuration Authorizations Options Qui Modalides de funcionamento O programa DARDO PLUS PC LITE pode operar em v rias modalidades dependendo da activac o ou n o da aquisic o e Nas condi es em que que o programa nao tem a aquisi o activa e foi aberto com o perfil de administrador possivel efectuar mudangas na configurag o na estrutura etc e Ao contr rio quando a aquisi o est activa n o poss vel efectuar mudan as na configura o Portas de comunica o A instala o constitu da por centrais s quais est o ligadas l mpadas necess rio instruir o programa e coloc lo em condi o de ver a instala o antes de definir a instala o propriamente dita Deve se definir no programa qual porta do PC entre as que ainda est o livres ser associada instala o uma conex o espec fica que n o possa ser confundida com outras A conex o poder ser local serial ou remota conex o por Ethernet Se for usado um cabo RS232 entre o PC e a s rie de centrais haver tamb m um conversor RS232 RS485 Se for usado um cabo RJ45 e uma ligac o a rede LAN havera na instalac o um CONVERSOR Ethernet RS232 O funcionamento atrav s do CONVERSOR Ethernet RS232
44. Select all 12 and Undo selection 13 buttons below the list are used to select and deselect all the fields The total number of pages 14 first page 15 and end printing 16 fields in the top part of the screen are used to select the pages for printing The data may occupy more than one print line depending on print size the width of the page or the positioning of the page The fields are printed consecutively on more than one line on the page The Lines printing per row of data field indicates the number of pages lines required 17 and the percentage of lines occupied 18 Select the Print graphics control box when using laser or inkjet printers This option ensures a better quality print with division lines and title boxes on a grey background This takes much more time when using a needle printer Use the spacing box 20 to select the distance between two lines of data This distance can be cancelled set at half a character or set at a whole character The lower part of the window displays the print character settings Use the Character 21 button to select font style and size of the character If a character with the printer symbol is used then printing will be much quicker particularly with needle printers The window can be reopened to select the printer 22 Send the printing 23 for execution or exit the printing window without doing anything 24 4 CAUTION I THE PRINTER CHARACTERS DISPLAYED ARE THOSE FO
45. Select all tout s lectionner 12 et Remove selection liminer s lection 13 situ s sous la liste permettent respectivement de s lectionner et d s lectionner tous les champs Dans la partie sup rieure figure le nombre total de pages total pages 14 ainsi que la page de d but print from page 15 et de fin d impression to page 16 s lectionnables par l utilisateur Dans impression d une ligne de donn es l espace occup sur la page varie en fonction de la dimension du caract re de la largeur et de l orientation de la page par cons quent il arrive que la s rie de donn es occupe plus d une ligne d impression L impression des champs s lectionn s sera r partie sur plusieurs lignes de la page de facon cons cutive La case Lines printing per row of data nombre de lignes imprim es par ligne de donn es fournit le nombre de pages lignes n cessaires 17 et lespace en pourcentage occup par la derni re ligne last line printing 18 La case de contr le Print graphics impression graphique 19 doit tre s lectionn e lorsqu on utilise des imprimantes laser ou a jet d encre Cette option permet de r aliser une meilleure impression avec des lignes de division et des encadr s de titres a fond gris Les imprimantes a aiguilles comportent des temps d attente beaucoup plus longs La liste de s lection de l interligne spacing 20 permet de s lectionner la distance entre une ligne de donn es et l autre Cette distanc
46. commande au poste Port de communication C e Ic ne de communication directe via port s rie RS485 ic ne repr sentant les cables de connexion s rie 10 Ic ne acquisition activ e 12 la LED est verte lorsque l acquisition est activ e rouge lorsqu elle est d sactiv e Case indiquant l tat des acquisitions 13 Lorsque le cycle d acquisition est activ par le bouton Lancer acquisition pr sent sur la fen tre principale l tat d avancement du cycle est indiqu par la progression des carr s bleus qui composent la barre la progression des carr s bleus est proportionnelle a Vavancement du cycle d acquisition Quand le cycle d acquisition est termin la barre est pleine de carr s bleus et les donn es disponibles sont mises a jour L acquisition continue de facon cyclique jusqu a ce que le bouton STOP soit enfonc Quand la communication est d sactiv e la barre est grise et les carr s bleus sont absents Si le cycle d acquisition est activ non pas par le bouton Lancer l acquisition mais directement depuis le poste il ny pas de carr s bleus pour indiquer l tat d avancement du cycle Case indiquant la description cod e en anglais des activit s de communication 14 Dardo Plus PC LITE FR 9 Schneider Sortie du programme Le menu File fichier pr voit le sous menu Quit guitter gui permet de sortir du programme DARDO PLUS PC LITE Il est possible de quitter gal
47. cunami 6 lef DN HORN viele Ve rn TEE 10 REZIMY TUNGOVAaNi ii 10 KOMUNIKAGHI DOWNY inni 10 Vlo en nov ho komunika n ho portu s sssussu2s22222222222 2222 2 11 Zru en komunika n ho portu weern rn en ek KEE KE KE KEE KE KE KEE KE Ku Ern 11 9 STC ie 12 VIOZENI SYSTEMU ren an 12 Viozeni TIGICICH JCQNOLEK sure aer 14 Druhy ovl dan ch d c ch jednotek ern ke KEE KEE KEE KENE KEE KEE E Kee 15 Konfigurace adres d c ch jednotek erer KEE KEE KEE KEE KEE KKK KEN 15 DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT ozana 16 SVNOPLCKY Panel acosan 16 Wd 16 DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RN eer KKK K E 21 SVNOPLCK Panel saias essaie ea 21 PTIK KA 21 P o E R rra 25 Seznam povolenou ad 25 Vlo en nov ho RTE TEE 26 mena hesla nino ani 26 FUAKCO EE 27 DOCK datan 34 AMD Yassin ia 35 Informace o lampaci cancer 38 UCA OS RE 39 Schneider Electric Uvod Tuto st p ru ky je t eba si p e st d v ne jinou dokumentaci a p ed prov d n m jak hokoliv z sahu na v robku N vod k pou it Komu je ur en Tato p ru ka je ur ena instala n m technik m kte maj dostate n znalosti k tomu aby mohli bezpe n prov d t z sahy na hardwarov ch a softwarov ch syst mech Software DARDO PLUS PC LITE byl vyvinut firmou SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC aby umo nil ir a pru n j ovl d n d c ch jednotek typu DARDO PLUS Tento program umo uje u ivateli dit ovl dat a programovat fungov n uvede
48. d c ch jednotek CS 4 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Pou it softwaru Prvn start V menu startu opera n ho syst mu zvolte menu Programy v n m zvolte skupinu program SCHNEIDER a pot otev ete slo ky Dardo Plus PC Lite pokud p i instalaci nebyl zm n n path a nebo n zev a spus te program DARDO PLUS PC LITE Program p i startu zobraz okno Dardo PC Lite XXX Enter User Hame and Password User name si Password ee E Vstup do programu je mo n pouze po zad n jm na u ivatele a hesla Udaje o spu t n programu zvolte Jm no u ivatele 1 gt Admin Heslo 2 gt Admin UPOZORN N el DOPORU UJEME P I PRVN M VSTUPU DO SYST MU ZM NIT HESLO Popsan po te n nastaven umo n do programu vstoupit jako spr vce tj s nejvy mi povolen mi k zen programu V p pad e nebude nic zvoleno program se za n kolik sekund spust automaticky pod profilem obecn ho u ivatele Pomoc funkc konfigurace je mo n zm nit dobu 3 kterou program ek ne se automaticky spust Charakteristiky dvou u ivatelsk ch rovn Spr vci Mohou zobrazovat v echna data programu mohou nastavovat data pou vat p kazy spou t t a ukon ovat cykly sb ru dat Pod profilem spr vce je mo n prov d t v echny operace m nit vlastnosti objekt rovn a definovat nov u ivatele Host Mohou zobrazovat v echna data p
49. de test d autonomie DARDO PLUS 1 Eg General status Test Inhibition Functional tests Even autonomy test Odd autonomy test Rest mode Restore Utility Short eye Faut Emergency n Communication e Test d autonomie impair 4 Les lampes impaires reli es pouvant accepter la commande sont en cours de test d autonomie Mode repos 5 Les lampes reli es subissant une panne de r seau sont dans un tat de secours inhib Restauration 6 La commande de Restauration est activ e Utilitaire 7 Le poste est en tat d utilitaire inhibition de l tat de secours e Court circuit ligne Dardo eye 8 La ligne de communication avec les lampes est en court circuit D faillance 9 Les lampes reli es la suite dun TEST DE FONCTIONNEMENT ou D AUTONOMIE pr sentent une d faillance e Etat de secours 10 Quelques unes ou toutes les lampes configur es ont communiqu au poste absence du r seau de recharge e Communication 11 D tection d une erreur de communication s rie La condition de signal activ survient quand la case en regard de l inscription est s lectionn e Dardo Plus PC LITE FR 19 Schneider Tests Indique les dates programm es des tests de fonctionnement 1 et d autonomie 2 Les dates des tests d autonomie des lampes impaires sont visualis es Il est possible de d terminer les dates des tests d autonomie des lampes paires en ajoutant 1
50. dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVERT First ON Lamprequied Defaul dministrator 31 06 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First II Se Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERI First mi Z L mprequired Detaull dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERT First II D Jlamprequied JDetaut dministator 51 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERI First ON 2 pred Delauk dministratar 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M 2 Lampreguied O 1 Defaul amp dministatoo 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERI First ON i L mprequired O Default amp dministator AA as a 3108 2007 9 03 18 SERVERT First O efault dministrator 317082007 3 03 18 SERVERI Pal of 31 0872007 8 5346 D 31 08 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M Di DefaultAdministratar D a i Login Default amp dministrator Default amp dministrator Control unit route LEVEL SERVER First FloorDardo Plus 1 Number of records peso C vm EEE Kolumnerna inneh ller foljande data v nster till hoger Datum och tid f r h ndelsens registrering h r anv nds det korta datumformatet som terfinns i kontrollpanelen 2 Anl ggningens namn 3 Inte anv nd 4 Styrenhetens adress 5 Inte anv nd 6 Inte anv nd 7 Lampnummer Dardo plus styrenhet 8 Namn som associerats lampan 9 Beskrivning av h ndelse 10 Anv ndare som har registre
51. droite contiennent les donn es suivantes e Date et heure d enregistrement de l v nement avec le format de date courte du panneau de configuration 2 Nom du syst me 3 Inutilis 4 Adresse du poste 5 Inutilis 6 Inutilis 7 Num ro lampe Dardo plus Control Unit 8 Nom associ a la lampe 9 Description de l v nement 10 Utilisateur ayant enregistr l v nement 11 FR 40 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Boutons de la fen tre Event log journal des v nements et recherche Les boutons situ s en bas de la fen tre permettent de g rer tous les v nements enregistr s dans la base de donn es et visualis s dans la fen tre Event log Ed Date System MI Cont Di Lan LamDP Hame Description User 31082007 9 03 26 SERVER First M oo J Lamprequired Default dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 26 SERVER Fist M A Lamprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERVER Fist M 8 tru _ Default amp dministrator 31708 2007 9 03 26 SERVERI Fist mM Z L mprequired Diefault dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 26 SERVER Fist M A Lamprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist M sni DefaulkAdministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist M D true Default amp dministrator 312082007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist TI DM oo BR ned Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 24 SE
52. e se okno kter umo uje zvolit druh p stroje kter m b t vlo en do syst mu Po proveden volby a nadefinov n adresy d c jednotky potvr te vlo en stisknut m tla tka OK Na pozad se zobraz synoptick panel odpov daj c zvolen d c jednotce Synoptick panel DP 1 5 Broken 3 States DO Test in progress Delta d c jednotka pod v n sleduj c informace z vadn ch 1 e Zelen jestli e neexistuj dn z vadn lampy Zlut jestli e je po et z vadn ch lamp ni ne limit stanoven v parametrech e erven jestli e je po et z vadn ch lamp vy ne limit stanoven v parametrech Stavy 2 Zelen v p pad e informace na displeji nepopisuj dn anom ln situace e Cerven v p pad Ze se vyskytly anom ln situace jako chyby v komunikaci stav utility stav rest anom lie pohotovost zablokovan testy zkrat na ovl dac lince lamp e Zlut v ostatn ch p padech Test pr v prob h 3 e erven pr v prob h test Zelen neprob h dn test Delta 4 e erven jestli e rozd l mezi datem a hodinou na PC a na d c jednotce p es hl hodnotu nastavenou v parametrech Zelen v opa n m p pad Delta ozna uje e datum a hodina proveden test neodpov daj nastaven v programu P kazy Je mo n nastavit datum hodinu a opakovan prov d
53. edchoz ho upozorn n N sledkem toho by se mohlo stat e ilustrace uveden v p ru ce nebudou pln odpov dat dodan mu v robku Zkontrolujte zda v echny p padn pravy i aktualizace p ru ky v robcem byly do t to p ru ky vlo eny a v len ny Uchov n p ru ky P ru ku je t eba uchov vat po celou dobu ivotnosti v robku aby mohla b t v p pad pot eby konzultov na a k dispozici pro p padn dal z sahy a instalace v robku Dardo Plus PC LITE CS 1 Schneider Electric Pou it symboly V p ru ce je pou ita ada symbol kter slou k tomu aby upozornily na rady pozn mky p edpisy a normy t kaj c se dn ho zp sobu pou it a bezpe nosti aplikace a rovn fyzick bezpe nosti obsluhy N sleduj c odstavce pod vaj p ehled hlavn ch symbol V eobecn pozn mky POZN MKA NEBO V EOBECN PRACOVN NORMA Sign ly upozor uj c na nebezpe pro osoby a nebo pro p stroj troj heln kov tvar N V EOBECN NEBEZPE PRO OSOBY A NEBO PRO P STROJ Upozorn n v Budete li pot ebovat technick informace o instalaci i o pou it v robku nebo v p pad poruchy na v robku se obra te na firmu SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC Y V robek bude dn fungovat pouze p i pou it na pohotovostn ch p stroj ch SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC v Likvidace v robku mus b t provedena v souladu s normami o ochran ivotn ho prost ed
54. haj c na d c ch jednotk ch zru umo uje opustit program pot co zastav sb r dat Tla tko Reset datab ze 7 Tla tko Backup datab ze 8 Ikona zkompaktov n 9 Dardo Plus PC LITE nahr v posledn kopii datab ze do podslo ky tempbck adres e instalace Stisknut m tohoto tla tka se program zav e aby umo nil nahr n dat p i n sleduj c m startu Prove te restart programu podle instrukc a vlo te heslo z lohuje kopii datab ze v okam iku kdy dojde k jeho stisknut Tato kopie se zaz lohuje do podslo ky tempbck adres e instalace a soubor se bude naz vat dardoLite mdb u otev en ho programu se ka dou hodinu automaticky provede backup datab ze tuto ikonu b n nen vid t Zobraz se kdy datab ze p es hne oMByt a v ce ne t den nebylo provedeno zkompaktovani Zkompaktov n se provede jedn m kliknut m Stisknut m tohoto tla tka se program zav e aby se mohl odpojit od datab ze Prove te restart programu podle instrukc a vlo te heslo Schneider CS 7 Electric UPOZORN N TLA TKO RESET DATAB ZE P EP E POSLEDN KOPII DATAB ZE DATY PR V POU VAN DATAB ZE P PADN ZM NY KTER V N BUDOU PROVEDENY MEZI ud OKAMZIKEM KDY BYLA VYTVORENA KOPIE DATAB ZE A OKAMZIKEM KDY BUDE TATO KOPIE NAHR NA ZP T SE ZTRAT e a O Tla tka rovn e Tla tko 10 umo uje z
55. igang forvarvcykeln helt automatiskt oberoende av operat rens vilja om du vid programstart inte matar in l senordet och inst lld tid for detta l per ut loggar du in som g s och forvarvcykeln kommer igang Du kan starta forvarvcykeln manuellt med knappen 1 Starta f rv rv Med detta kommando forvarvas data om samtliga objjekt i alla anlaggningar som anslutits till datorn Knappen Starta f rv rv beskrivs i avsnittet Kommandoknappar O 20 Om du vill f rv rva data enbart fr n objekt som r kopplade till en viss styrenhet h gerklicka p symbolschemat f r styrenheten i fr ga i alla kontroll gen en meny ppnas och du v ljer posten Kommandon 2 DP 1 Broken alles Commands ke Test in progress Open Control Unit Remove Control Unit Properties SV 34 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Ett f nster ppnas markera Forv rv och starta proceduren genom att trycka knappen Skicka 3 Controls on control unit 1 Acquisition Acquisition Inhibit test Disable inhibit Restore Functional tests Even lamps autonomy test Odd lamps autonomy test Rest Test duration in minutes 5 O Time of test 00 00 00 00 Start day and month o 401 01 101 2008 Inuti kommandona v ljer du 4 kommandot som ska skickas Lampor Indikering p lampornassymbolscheman For att visa statuset for lampor som associerats till en viss styren
56. il suo utilizzo e facoltativo 2 Dardo Parameters ES Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings Dardo Plus PC LITE TimeOut Duration Level Hames Log Maximum number of log 5000 1 Beep o 2 Schneider IT 29 d Electric Tentativi d acquisizione E il numero di tentativi di connessione agli impianti per l acquisizione dei dati effettuati dal programma DARDO PLUS PC LITE prima di segnalare lo stato d errore di comunicazione tentativi vengono impostati da un minimo di 6 ad un massimo di 20 Dardo Parameters TimeOut Duration LevelNames Lo Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings Current value of acquisition attempts E Me value of acquisition attempts D Delay cycles after test f r lamp acquisition d Soglia Questo valore determina quale percentuale di lampade in anomalia pu essere accettata prima di una segnalazione di guasto ad un impianto Il colore che compare nel sinottico delle centraline in funzione del valore impostato in questo parametro Ad esempio se il valore impostato 50 prima dell accensione del led di rosso di guasto devono essere in anomalia almeno il 50 delle lampade collegate Quando la percentuale di apparecchi in anomalia inferiore a quella impostata il led di segnalazione assume il colore giallo Dardo Parameters TirneO ut Duration Level Names Log Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Sett
57. jour aux dates visualis es FR 20 DARDO PLUS 1 Functional tests 0 201 2006 03 01 2006 04 01 2006 05 01 2006 06 01 2006 O01 2008 UO 2006 09 01 2006 10401 2006 11 01 2006 12 01 2006 13401 2006 14 01 2006 15 01 2006 Operating time test OFA 22007 3 00 00 14212007 3 00 00 2148202007 3 00 00 2011 2 2007 3 00 00 04 01 006 3 00 00 11 01 2006 6 00 00 16 01 2006 6 00 00 25 01 2006 5 00 00 01 102 2006 9 00 00 08 02 2006 9 00 00 15 02 2008 5 00 00 2202 2006 3 00 00 902 2006 9 00 00 071052006 6 00 00 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM Contr le a distance des lampes auto aliment es DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM est un poste concu pour les lampes auto aliment es o il est possible de programmer les tests de fonctionnement et d autonomie en configurant leur date leur heure et leur p riodicit Sur ce poste il est possible de lancer des commandes interactives Cliquer sur l arri re plan et s lectionner Insert control unit Entrer un poste une fen tre s ouvre ou il est possible de s lectionner le type d appareil a entrer dans le systeme Apres avoir effectu la s lection d finir l adresse du poste puis confirmer l entr e a l aide du bouton OK a Un synoptique appara t correspondant au poste s lectionn Synoptique DP DM 2 W Broken O States O Test in progress W Delta Le poste pr sente les indications suivantes
58. la liste ventuelle des lampes associ es Lamp 27 Une liste non s lectionn e signifie que tous les l ments sont compris Il y a quatre types d v nements Event type 28 Erreurs de communication Erreurs de fonctionnement du programme Ev nements li s aux postes Ev nements li s aux lampes Les v nements li s aux postes et aux lampes sont des enregistrements montrant un changement d tat des caract ristiques correspondantes Event 29 La liste Erreur Error 30 permet de s lectionner uniquement des v nements d erreur ou uniquement des v nements d information La liste utilisateur User permet de choisir uniquement les v nements li s a un utilisateur d termin 31 De A From To permet de s lectionner les enregistrements d une p riode d termin e 32 Message permet de s lectionner les enregistrements ayant la m me description 33 Notes permet de s lectionner les enregistrements avec une note 34 Dardo Plus PC LITE FR 43 Schneider ndice PIEMISSAS arar rra rr 1 O manual de INSTUCOOS suivant 1 A quem A e PPP seas ON 1 Importancia do Manual isos orion 1 Conservacao do Manta EE 1 Simbologia USAda ET 2 AVISOS annees cn manne ane DR ane sion 2 Conteudo da embalagem siria 3 INTOFMAGCOES GCI ANS sintio 4 Organiza o das Inst lacoeS msi ii 4 Gest o das instala eS nana nin 4 USO dO SOMWANlS sia 5 Primeira INICIA O inn sn 5 Janela PRINCIPAL siii rra 6 salda
59. la personne et ou pour l appareil forme triangulaire N DANGER DE NATURE GENERALE POUR LA PERSONNE ET OU POUR L APPAREIL Mises en garde v Pour toute information technique concernant l installation et l utilisation du produit ou bien en cas de d faillance s adresser SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC v Le bon fonctionnement du produit est garanti uniquement s il est utilis conjointement avec des appareils de secours SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC v L limination du produit doit avoir lieu conform ment aux normes de protection de l environnement en vigueur dans le pays d utilisation ATTENTION LE NON RESPECT DES INSTRUCTIONS D INSTALLATION ET D UTILISATION DE L APPAREIL IMPLIQUE LANNULATION DE LA GARANTIE FR 2 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Electric Contenu de emballage Ouvrir l emballage et v rifier que la fourniture est complete 1 CD DARDO PC LITE 2 Manuel d installation Dardo Plus PC LITE Schn eid er FR 3 d Electric Informations g n rales Organisation des syst mes Lid e de base de application consiste en une structure organis e sur plusieurs niveaux ou sont repr sent s e Le s systeme s e Le s poste s La les lampes s Les l ments de chaque niveau peuvent tre renomm s pour repr senter les caract ristigues physigues du syst me Syst me tc Lampes Gestion des syst mes Le programme DARDO PLUS PC LITE est en mesure de dialoguer avec les postes de la famille DA
60. ljande typer av styrenheter o DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT ar en styrenhet f r Overvakning av sjalvmatade lampor med programmering av funktions och brinntidstester samt tillhorande datum tid och periodicitet Styrenhet for Overvakning av sj lvmatade lampor s ndning av kommandon b de via tangentbord och via Overvakare samt h mtning av lampstatusdata fr n Overvakaren Den h r styrenheten r mottaglig f r interaktiva kommandon o DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM ar en styrenhet for Overvakning av sjalvmatade lampor med programmering av funktions och brinntidstester samt tillhorande datum tid och periodicitet Styrenhet for Overvakning av sjalvmatade lampor s ndning av kommandon via 24 Vdc sp nning p vissa ingangar Den har styrenheten ar inte mottaglig for interaktiva kommandon Konfigurering av styrenhetsaddresser Styrenheternas adresser definieras vid anlaggningens installation vilket satt detta sker p beror pa aktuell typ av styrenhet Rotary switch eller initiering Inuti DARDO PLUS PC LITE m ste finnas samma adresser som konfigurerats inuti styrenheterna e Styrenheterna DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT sjalvmatade lampor denna typ av styrenheter kan adresseras decimalt mellan 001 till 255 med slumpvis numrering e Styrenheterna DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM Fjarrstyrd kontroll av sjavmatade lampor denna typ av styrenheter kan adresseras decimalt mellan 001 till 255 med slumpvis numrering Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider SV 15 E
61. main window Make sure that the enable acquisition box has been selected EN 12 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric The systems are displayed in a long rectangle with the name and a square shown on the L H side 7 The colour of the square changes according to system status The colours identifying status are as follows e Flashing Black Grey when the system has not yet been configured and acquired e Flashing Grey Red if one of the objects at the next level has a red or yellow warning signal e Green when all of the objects at the next level have only green warning signals File z mi a LI LE U E LU e a T rr 5 CH Cu 3 Ful T mar CH I schneider Open System Remove System 10 Properties D When you click on a system object the outline of the sguare becomes blue When you right click on a selected system object a menu opens to allow you to perform the following operations e Open system 8 is equivalent to pressing the go to next level arrow to display the control units at that level e Remove system 9 selected it is equivalent to pressing the Remove button described in the Command buttons paragraph e Properties 10 displays the information on the selected system A window opens displaying the settings and all the descriptions set in the system and is equivalent to pressing th
62. n funk n ch test 1 a test autonomie 2 V okn p kaz t kaj c ch se funk n ho testu a testu autonomie je mo n prov st kompletn nastaven v ech parametr t kaj c ch se ovl d n a kontrol jako nap opakov n testu po dnech 3 d lku trv n testu v minut ch 4 datum testu 5 a hodinu 6 za tku v hodin ch a v minut ch Toto nastaven zm n nastaven v d c jednotce CS 16 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric Popis p kaz Zablokov n testu nen p ijato jestli e e d c jednotka je ji ve stavu aktivn ho zablokov n na ovl dac lince lamp je zkrat Deaktivace zablokov n testu je p ijata jestli e d c jednotka je ve stavu aktivn ho zablokov n Controls on control unit 1 ES Acquisition F Enter Set date and time Set test 0 00 00 Functional tests Operating time test Length of test period in days 4 Test duration in minutes 3 RE Time of test 00 00 00 00 Start day and month o 401 D 017 2008 aqua Restore je prijat jestlize e d c jednotka je ve stavu aktivn ho zablokov n Rest nebo Utility na ovl dac lince lamp nen zkrat Funk n test nen p ijat jestli e je aktivn stav zablokov n e funk n test pr v prob h e test autonomie sud ch nebo lich ch lamp pr v prob h na ovl dac lince lamp je zkrat Test autonomie sud ch la
63. non ci sono lampade guaste Giallo se c un numero di lampade guaste inferiore alla soglia definita nei parametri e Rosso se c un numero di lampade guaste superiore alla soglia definita nei parametri Stati 2 Verde nel caso in cui le indicazioni del display non presentano situazioni di anomalia Rosso nel caso in cui siano presenti condizioni di anomalia come errori di comunicazione stato di utility stato di rest anomalia emergenza Test inibiti corto circuito sulla linea di controllo lampade Giallo negli altri casi Test in corso 3 Rosso test in corso Verde nessun test in corso Delta 4 Rosso se lo sfasamento di data e ora tra il PC e la centralina ha superato il valore impostato nei parametri Verde in caso contrario II Delta indica se le date e ora di esecuzione dei test non sono corrispondenti con le impostazioni del programma Comandi possibile impostare data ora e periodicit dei Test Funzionali 1 e di Autonomia 2 Nella finestra dei comandi relativi a Test funzionale e Test di autonomia possibile impostare in modo completo tutti i parametri relativi ai controlli quali periodo test in giorni 3 durata test in minuti 4 data del test 5 e ora 6 di inizio in ore e minuti Questa programmazione ha l effetto di modificare quella impostata nella centralina IT 16 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Descrizione dei comandi Inibizione test non e accettato
64. non si preme il pulsante STOP Quando la comunicazione non attiva la barra grigia ed i quadratini blu sono assenti Nel caso in cui il ciclo di acquisizione non sia attivato dal pulsante Avvia acquisizione ma direttamente dalla centralina non si ha la presenza dei quadratini blu ad indicare lo stato di avanzamento del ciclo Casella in cui compare la descrizione codificata in inglese delle attivit di comunicazione 14 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schn eid er IT 9 BP Electric Uscita dal programma II menu File prevede il sottomenu Esci che permette di uscire dal programma DARDO PLUS PC LITE E possibile uscire anche con il Pulsante Esci descritto nel paragrafo Pulsanti di comando Configuration Authorizations Options Qui Modalit di funzionamento Il programma DARDO PLUS PC LITE pu operare in due diverse modalit a seconda che ci sia l acquisizione attiva o meno e Nelle condizioni in cui il programma non ha l acquisizione attiva ed e stato aperto con il profilo d amministratore possibile effettuare modifiche di configurazione di struttura ecc e Viceversa quando l acquisizione attiva non possibile effettuare modifiche di configurazione Porte di comunicazione L impianto e costituito da centraline a cui sono collegate delle lampade necessario istruire il programma e metterlo in condizione di vedere l impianto prima di definire l impianto stesso Si dovr definire nel programma quale p
65. och memorerar inuti historiken alla larm och oregelbundenheter som systemet upptackt Handbokens vikt Den har handboken inneh ller all informaiton som kr vs f r att kunna anv nda produkten Kopiering mangfaldigande och overforing av denna dokumentation till tredje part utan foregaende skriftlig auktorisation fran SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ar forbjuden SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC forbehaller sig rattigheten att utan forvarning infora andringar i syfte att forbattra sina produkter Till foljd av detta kan det intraffa att handbokens bilder inte sammanfaller med levererad produkt Forsakra er om att utforda uppdateringar som tillverkaren skickar ut infogas i bruksanvisningen Forvara handboken Handboken ska forvaras val for framtida anvandning under produktens hela livslangd samt goras tillganglig vid eventuell ny installation Dardo Plus PC LITE SV 1 Schneider Electric Anv nda symboler Inuti handboken har vi anvant en rad symboler vars uppgift ar att f nga anvandarens uppm rksamhet och framh va anm rkningar p bud foreskrifter och normer som g ller apparatens s kerhet och korrekta anv ndning samt operatorens h lsa Nedan listas de mest anv nda symbolerna Allm n info a OPERATIV ANMARKNING ELLER NORM AV ALLMAN KARAKTAR Varningsskyltar som g ller personens och eller utrusntingens s kerhet trekantiga N ALLM N FARA F R PERSONEN OCHR ELLER UTRUSTNINGEN Foreskrifter och varningar Y Om du beh ver teknisk infor
66. of acquisition attempts E Mes value of acquisition attempts E Delay cycles after test for lamp acquisition d Troskel Det har vardet bestammer andelen felfungerande lampor systemet kan godta innan oregelbundenheten signaleras till anlaggningen Fargen pa styrenheternas symbolschema varierar alltefter vardet man stallt in pa denna parameter Om v rdet ar 50 innan den r da lysdioden t nds m ste minst 50 av aslutna lampor vara i anomali Nar andelen lampor i anomali ligger under inst llningen lyser lysdioden gult Dardo Parameters Timelut Duration Level Namez Log Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings Percentage threshold of value of broken lamps Current threshold value S Mew threshold value 50 cancel SV 30 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Delta Hogsta till tna tidsforskjutning i minuter mellan den p DARDO PLUS PC LITE installda testperiodiciteten och den som programmerats i styrenheten Det r allts h gsta till tna skillnad i minuter mellan klockan inuti datorn och klockan inuti styrenheten Dardo Parameters TimeOut Duration Level Names Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings Maximum delta of counters in minutes Current value 10 Mew value 10 a Installningar V ljer du rutan Tooltip images kan du associera en bild till varje objekt styrenhet eller lampa Dardo Param
67. of records 52 10 Po et ud lost 1 zobrazuje po et ud lost v tabulce log Tla tko Backup 2 z lohuje kopii obsahu m ky log kter se zobraz v okam iku stisknut tohoto tla tka Kopie obsahu m ky log se zaz lohuje do slo ek nazvan ch jako program Soubor se bude naz vat log txt pol ka jsou odd lena tak e se jedn o form t pou iteln i v MS Excelu Tla tko Smazat 3 umo uje smazat zvolen z znamy Pohybov n m my po z znamech jednotliv dky zpr vy a z rove se stisknut m tla tkem CTRL je mo n roz it po et zvolen ch pol ek Chcete li Smazat v echny z znamy ani byste je museli jednotliv volit sta nejprve stisknout tla tko Zvolit v e 8 Tla tko Pozn mky 4 umo uje p i adit koment k jednomu nebo k v ce pol k m Z znamy je mo n zvolit tak e podr te stisknut tla tko CTRL a kliknete lev m tla tkem my i na lev okraj m ky U z znam s p i azen m koment em se na za tku popisu zobrazuje hv zdi ka Tla tko Uznat 7 odstra uje ervenou ikonu z ok nka 1 a p padn sign l beep m ozna e ud lost byla syst mem uzn na a skon il stav anom lie Path d c jednotky 10 ozna uje do jak ho syst mu je zapojena d c jednotka kterou jste zvolili v tabulce Tla tko Tisk 5 umo uje vytisknout data zvolen na m ce P ed prav m oknem t
68. outros casos Teste em curso 3 Vermelho teste em curso o Verde nenhum teste em curso Delta 4 e Vermelho se a desfasarem de data e hora entre o PC e a central superou o valor definido nos par metros e Verde no caso contr rio O Delta indica se as datas e a hora de execu o dos testes nao correspondem com as defini es do programa Comandos poss vel definir data hora e periodicidade dos Testes de Funcionamento Functional Tests 1 e de Autonomia Operating time test 2 Na janela dos comandos relativos a Teste de funcionamento e Teste de autonomia poss vel definir de modo completo todos os par metros relativos aos controlos tais como per odo de teste em dias 3 durac o do teste em minutos 4 data do teste 5 e hora 6 de in cio em horas e minutos Esta programac o tem o efeito de modificar a definida na central PT 16 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Descric o dos comandos Inibic o do teste n o aceito se e a central j estiver no estado de inibi o activa curto circuito na linha de controlo das l mpadas Desactiva inibi o aceito se e a central estiver no estado de Inibic o activa Controls on control unit 1 E Acquisition F Enter set date and time Set test 0 00 00 Functional tests Operating time test Length of test period in days EM I Test duration in minutes EI LI Time of test 00 00 00 00 start day and month
69. paese di utilizzo del apparecchiatura ATTENZIONE LA INOSSERVANZA DELLE ISTRUZIONI DI INSTALLAZIONE ED USO DELL APPARATO COMPORTA IL DECADIMENTO DELLA GARANZIA IT 2 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Electric Contenuto dell imballo Aprire l imballo e controllare che la fornitura sia completa 1 CD DARDO PC LITE 2 Manuale di installazione Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneid er IT 3 S Electric Informazioni Generali Organizzazione degli impianti L idea che sta alla base del applicazione e un organizzazione strutturale a vari livelli che rappresentano e L impianto i La centralina e La lampada e Gli elementi di ogni livello possono essere rinominati per rappresentare la realt fisica dell impianto Centralina I Gestione degli impianti Il programma DARDO PLUS PC LITE in grado dialogare con le Centraline della famiglia DARDO PLUS rendendo possibile monitorare un sistema di lampade su larga scala L applicazione permette all utente di gestire controllare e programmare il funzionamento delle singole centraline Con DARDO PLUS PC LITE possibile eseguire comandi interattivi offrendo le stesse funzionalit presenti nei pannelli delle Centraline risultati dei test e le eventuali anomalie dei sistemi controllati sono registrati dal programma DARDO PLUS PC LITE permettendo all operatore di eseguire ricerche e stampe degli eventi acquisiti Per maggiori dettagli sulle caratteristiche delle singole cent
70. poste est d ja dans un tat actif d inhibition il y a un court circuit sur la ligne de contr le des lampes La commande de d sactivation de inhibition du test est accept e si le poste est dans un tat actif d inhibition Controls on control unit 1 E Acquisition F Enter set date and time Set test 0 00 00 Functional tests Operating time test Length of test period in days EM I Test duration in minutes EI LI Time of test 00 00 00 00 start day and month 01 01 01 01 2008 La commande de restauration Restore est accept e si e le poste est dans un tat actif d inhibition Rest Repos ou Utility Utilitaire il ny a pas de court circuit sur la ligne de contr le des lampes La commande de test de fonctionnement n est pas accept e si tat actif d inhibition test de fonctionnement en cours test d autonomie pair ou impair en cours il y a un court circuit sur la ligne de contr le des lampes La commande de test d autonomie des lampes paires ou de test d autonomie des lampes impaires n est pas accept e si e charge incompl te sur les lampes 24 h tat actif d inhibition test de fonctionnement en cours test d autonomie pair ou impair en cours il y a un court circuit sur la ligne de contr le des lampes La commande de repos Rest est accept e si tat d urgence et non de court circuit sur la ligne Eye Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider FR 17 BP Ele
71. prav m tla tkem my i na pozad bude mo n zvolit Vlo it d c jednotku otev e se okno kter umo n zvolit druh p stroje kter chcete vlo it do syst mu 1 Druhy p stroj kter Ize zvolit jsou d c jednotky skupiny Dardo Po proveden volby je t eba nadefinovat adresu 2 d c jednotky P ed potvrzen m jej ho vlo en stiskn te tla tko OK Na pozad se zobraz synopticky panel 3 odpov daj c zvolen d c jednotce DP 1 3 SoBroken ch States 3 Test in progress c Delta Podrobnosti o vlastnostech jednotliv ch d c ch jednotek naleznete v odstavci Druhy zen ch d c ch jednotek d c jednotky se budou zobrazovat jako tvere ky se zna kou v horn sti kter bude ur ovat d c jednotku a n kolika kontrolkami kter budou m nit barvu podle jej ho stavu P i spu t n sb ru dat se provede aktualizace stavu kontrolek na synoptick m panelu Barvy kontrolek ur en stavu mohou b t n sleduj c ed erven lut a zelen V znam barev je podrobn vysv tlen v p ru ce jednotliv ch d c ch jednotek P i kliknut na synoptick panel d c jednotky se obrys tvere ku zv razn mod e m se potvrd volba CS 14 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric DF 1 Broken ES States amp Test in progress Delta Commands Open Control Unit E WE L L
72. se usam impressoras a laser ou a jacto de tinta Esta op o realiza uma impress o de melhor qualidade com linhas de divis o e quadros dos t tulos com fundo cinza Nas impressoras matriciais a impress o leva tempos consideravelmente maiores A lista de selec o do espa amento Spacing 20 permite seleccionar a dist ncia entre duas linhas de dados Esta dist ncia pode ser anulada posta em meio espa o ou espa o inteiro A parte de baixo da janela mostra as defini es da fonte de impress o O bot o Fonte Character 21 permite escolher o tipo o estilo e o tamanho da fonte Usando a fonte com o s mbolo da impressora a impress o pode se tornar mais r pida especialmente no caso das matriciais poss vel reabrir a janela para seleccionar a impressora Printer 22 Mandar imprimir Print 23 ou sair da janela de impress o sem fazer nada 24 ATEN O d AS FONTES DE IMPRESS O VISUALIZADOS S O OS DA IMPRESSORA PREDEFINIDA NO PAINEL DE CONTROLO PT 42 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric O bot o Busca Search 6 permite seleccionar um subconjunto de eventos mostrado na grade dos registos 25 Log search System SER VERT First Floor 01 d F Event type Event Control unit F IDP Communicaiion Error Leer omy MM Dr Wu Mabe wa JL e 30 Tipos de eventos registados A Busca pode ser o conjunto de v rios crit rios associados de qualquer modo Po
73. un data base con una struttura a coda circolare denominato FIFO ossia il primo registrato e il primo eliminato quando si esaurisce lo spazio disponibile II numero di eventi che si vogliono conservare che definiscono lo spazio disponibile viene definito dall utente nel menu Modifica Parametri Alla chiusura del programma se l utente risponde si alla domanda presente nella finestra che appare prima della chiusura viene salvata una copia del database in una cartella denominata con un numero corrispondente al giorno della settimana II file si chiama dardoLite mdb E possibile eseguire la stessa operazione di salvataggio del database con il pulsante Backup database Gli eventi registrati sono legati al funzionamento del programma ad esempio possono essere e L apertura ola chiusura del programma e lo stato della comunicazione e un cambiamento di stato delle centraline o delle lampade Le segnalazioni possono essere errori o avvertimenti Per aprire la finestra di gestione degli eventi basta un doppio click sulla barra 1 di visualizzazione dell ultimo errore o avvertimento posizionata nella parte inferiore dello schermo o EZ All interno di questa pagina possibile effettuare ricerche e stampare i record Nel caso in cui sia rilevato un evento il programma segnala la registrazione ed emette un suono beep periodico configurabile come opzione nel menu Opzioni Parametri Log Oltre a questa segnala
74. 01 401 MT Restore restabelece aceito se e a central est no estado de inibic o activa Rest Repouso ou Utility Servico a linha de controlo l mpadas n o est em curto circuito Teste de Funcionamento n o aceito se e estado de inibic o activa teste de funcionamento em curso teste de autonomia pares ou impares em curso curto circuito na linha de controlo das l mpadas Teste de Autonomia das lampadas pares Teste de Autonomia das lampadas impares nao aceito se o carga n o completa nas l mpadas 24h estado de inibic o activa teste de funcionamento em curso teste de autonomia pares ou impares em curso curto circuito na linha de controlo das l mpadas Rest Respouso aceito se e em emerg ncia e linha Eye n o est em curto Dardo Plus PC LITE PT 17 Schneider Propriedade Gerais DARDO PLUS 1 General Status Test Marne Dardo Plus 1 es Address Acquisition cycles 4 O ee NES Notes Ao seleccionar o ponto 1 poss vel atribuir um nome a central Ao seleccionar o ponto 2 poss vel ao operador mudar a fregu ncia de aguisic o da central supervisionada O par metro ciclos de aquisi o definido inicialmente no valor 1 Este par metro indica a frequ ncia de aquisic o de dados da central em relac o aos ciclos de aquisic o O valor 1 indica que executada a aquisic o dos dados da central sempre que for executado um ciclo de aquisic o O valo
75. 02 07 2006 9 25 20 Connection serial port o 1200 6 7 2 COM 1 Acquire Acquisition Enabled External Contacts Description E change Contacts Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider SV 13 Electric Infoga styrenhet Efter att ha infogat anl ggningen definierat aktuell typ av kommunikation och n gra egenskaper kan du infoga styrenheterna Programmet m ste instrueras s att det kan se och identifiera styrenheterna Fonstret p datorns sk rm inneh ller en lista Over olika typer av styrenheter och d r kan du v lja vilka som utgor anlaggningen Insert control unit Control unit type DARDO PLUS Control unit name Dardo Plus 1 1 Address Om du g r till niv n Styrenhetsgrupp som blir synlig om man ppnar anl ggningen eller trycker p pil fram t pilen till h ger som beskrivs iiavsnittet Kommandoknappar och h gerklickar p bakgrunden v ljer du Infoga styrenhet ett f nster ppnas och du blir fr gad att definiera vilken typ av apparater som ska infogas i anl ggningen 1 Valbara apparater r i sj lva verket styrenheter i Dardo serien Efter valet m ste man definiera styrenhetens adress 2 och sedan bekr fta infogandet med knappen OK P bakgrunden visas ett symbolschema 3 av vald styrenhet DP 1 CI Broken id States 3 Test in progress c Delta F r ytterligare information om den enskilda styrenhetens egenskaper var
76. 1 2006 14 01 2006 15 01 2006 Operating time test OFA 22007 3 00 00 14212007 3 00 00 2148202007 3 00 00 2011 2 2007 3 00 00 04 01 006 3 00 00 11 01 2006 6 00 00 16 01 2006 6 00 00 25 01 2006 5 00 00 01 102 2006 9 00 00 08 02 2006 9 00 00 15 02 2008 5 00 00 2202 2006 3 00 00 902 2006 9 00 00 071052006 6 00 00 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM Controllo remoto lampade autoalimentate DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM e una centralina per lampade autoalimentate dove e possibile programmare i test funzionali e i test di autonomia configurandone data ora e periodicita Su questa centralina e possibile inviare comandi interattivi Cliccando sullo sfondo si seleziona Inserisci centralina si apre la finestra che permette la scelta del tipo di apparato da inserire nell impianto Dopo avere eseguito la selezione necessario definire l indirizzo della centralina e confermare l inserimento premendo il pulsante OK Sullo sfondo compare il sinottico corrispondente alla centralina selezionata Sinottico DP DM W Broken O States O Test in progress W Delta La centralina ha le seguenti indicazioni guaste 1 e Verde se non ci sono lampade guaste e Giallo se c un numero di lampade guaste inferiore alla soglia definita nei parametri e Rosso se c un numero di lampade guaste superiore alla soglia Stati 2 Verde nel caso in cui le indicazioni del
77. 3 o Vermelho teste em curso Verde nenhum teste Delta 4 e Vermelho se a defasagem de data e hora entre o PC e a central superou o valor definido nos par metros o Verde no caso contr rio O par metro Delta indica se as datas e a hora das centrais n o correspondem com as defini es do programa Comandos Est o dispon veis os comandos Aquisi o 1 inicia o ciclo de aquisi o da central o Define data e ora 2 data e hora do PC enviadas a central Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider PT 21 TP Electric Controls on control unit 2 Set date and time Propriedades Gerais DARDO PLUS RM 1 General Status Test Mame Dardo Plus 1 5 Address Acquisition cycles LI DL Notes Es PT 22 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Ao seleccionar o ponto 1 poss vel atribuir um nome a central Ao seleccionar o ponto 2 poss vel ao operador mudar a fregu ncia de aguisic o da central supervisionada O par metro ciclos de aquisi o definido inicialmente no valor 1 Este par metro indica a frequ ncia de aquisic o de dados da central em relac o aos ciclos de aquisic o O valor 1 indica que executada a aquisic o dos dados da central sempre que for executado um ciclo de aquisic o O valor 2 indica que executada a aquisic o dos dados da central a cada dois ciclos de aquisic o O valor 0 indica que nunca executada a aquisic o dos dados da central Ao selec
78. 7 9 03 20 SERWER Fist M E Lamp regured O Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M arp required _ Default amp dministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M Lamp required Default dministrator EE U e DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 8 53 46 Default amp dministrator Control unit route LEVEL SERVER First FloorDardo Plus 1 Number of records 52 10 Numero di eventi 1 visualizza il numero di eventi della tabella log Pulsante Backup 2 salva una copia del contenuto della griglia del log visualizzata nel momento in cui viene premuto La copia del contenuto viene salvata nella cartella denominata con il nome del programma Il file si chiama log txt campi sono separati da quindi in un formato utilizzabile anche con MS Excel Il pulsante Cancella 3 permette di cancellare i record selezionati Muovendo il mouse sui record righe di messaggio e tenendo premuto il tasto di CTRL possibile ampliare il numero di campi selezionati Per cancellare tutti i record senza doverli selezionare singolarmente sufficiente premere prima il pulsante Seleziona tutto 8 II pulsante Note 4 permette di associare un commento ad uno o pi campi record si selezionano tenendo premuto il tasto CTRL e con il click del pulsante sinistro del mouse sul bordo sinistro della griglia record che hanno una nota associata visualizzano un asterisco in testa alla descrizione Il p
79. DARDO PLUS PC LITE Programma di supervisione per sistemi SCHNEIDER Monitoring program for SCHNEIDER systems Programme de contr le pour systemes SCHNEIDER Programa de supervis o para sistemas SCHNEIDER d c program pro syst my SCHNEIDER Program f r overvakning av SCHNEIDER system Manuale di uso User Manual Manuel d utilisation Manual de uso N vod k pou it Bruksanvisning Schneider IT EN FR PT CS SV Manuale GNU SOs sai a IT 1 User Mana lesa aan tan hou EN 1 Manuel d utilisation EEN FR 1 Manual de USO PT 1 N vod k pouziti rer rr rr rr o o nh CS 1 BEURKSANVISNINO secas donadas SV 1 ee 1 II manuale IStrUZzlON less 1 PC SI FIV OIG rro RC CSS E 1 Importanza del manuale RK RKA KR rr KRK RR KRKA RRD 1 Conservazione del Manuale sis RK RR RKA RR RAR KAR KKR RR RR RAR RR RA AR 1 Simbologia ULIIZZaALA ir 2 AVNVEReCNZO rr 2 Contenuto dell INI ANNO amis rre 3 informazioni Generali aia sic 4 Organizzazione degli impianti sek erk KEN KENE KEE KEE KEE KEE KEE EEN KEE KN 4 Gestione degli ve ET e EE 4 Utilizzo del SOMWAr ani ta 5 PRIMO AAVV Oise 5 Finestra PFINCIPAIE rise 6 Uscita dal DOUANES 2 6e 10 Modalit di funzionamento eege 10 Porte di comunicazione ccccocococooococo ER ER ER ER aaa 10 Inserimento nuova Porta di Comunicazione neuen kukn KN KN KR KR KR KR KR KR KR Km 11 Eliminazione Porta di comunicazione nen ennen KR KR ER ER KENE KR RER ER KEN ER Ku 11 IM DIGNO zzz aaa
80. DO States E Test in progress P klad um st n kurzoru u ikony zvolen lampy v imn te si ir ho modr ho okraje Chcete li p i adit lamp obr zek je t eba 1 um stit kurzor na synoptick panel lampy 2 kliknout na n j aby se zobrazilo menu Vlastnosti 3 kliknout na menu aby se zobrazilo okno Vlastnosti Lampa 1 Kliknout na menu Vlastnosti se rovn stisknut tla tka Vlastnosti v hlavn m okn popsan m v odstavci Ovl dac tla tka 4 V okn Vlastnosti Lampa zvolte slo ky Obecn 2 5 Kliknut m na tla tko 3 na p su Skupina se zobraz okno Zm na skupiny 4 v n m je mo n zvolit skupinu do kter jednotliv lampy pat a zobrazen kter jim chcete p i adit voliteln nebo tuto skupinu zm nit 6 Kliknut m na tla tko 5 je mo n lamp p i adit popis 011411 Plant Schneider General Technical Data Status Number mo Name Everlux R4 D E Change family CS 32 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric Jazyk File Configuration Authorizations Maite Sal poe Modif parameters Language Warnings V tomto menu je mo n zm nit jazyk Zvolen m funkce Jazyk se zobraz okno s vlajkami r zn ch zem a kliknut m my na p slu nou vlajku se nastav jazyk t to zem Language Upozorn n File Configuration Authorizations Mie Su Gr mj Mod
81. Depois de ter inserido a instala o e as centrais que a comp em no programa nao necess rio inserir as l mpadas conectas s centrais Ao terminar a configura o suficiente iniciar um ciclo de aquisi o que permite visualizar os sin pticos das l mpadas conectadas e portanto formar uma lista das l mpadas conectadas e n o conectadas A aquisi o al m de ser um procedimento autom tico que ocorre com a periodicidade definida na fase de configura o pode ser activada manualmente Nota presente uma condi o que pode iniciar automaticamente o ciclo de aquisi o independentemente da vontade do operador ao iniciar o programa se n o for digitada uma senha e passar o tempo til para a sua inser o entra se no programa como convidado mas come a ao mesmo tempo o ciclo de aquisi o O ciclo de aquisi o pode ser iniciado manualmente premendo o bot o 1 Inicia aquisi o Com este comando executada a aquisi o dos dados relativos aos objectos de todas as instala es conectadas ao do descrito no par grafo Bot es de comando PC O bot o Inicia aquisi o Se se deseja adquirir somente os dados dos objectos conectados a uma central clicar com a tecla direita do mouse no sin ptico de uma central seleccionada em todas as modalidades de controlo abre se um menu no qual seleccionar o item Comandos commands 2 DP 1 Broken DELE Commands
82. Durata Con questo parametro si pu impostare e il numero di secondi di attesa dopo l invio di un comando prima di continuare con altre operazioni 1 e i decimi di secondo di attesa fra due cicli di acquisizione 2 e attesa in millisecondi per il timer interno del motore di acquisizione nel passaggio di interrogazione tra una centralina e l altra 3 Dardo Parameters E Threshold Delta Settings Acquisition attempts Y Duration Level Mames Log TimeOut MW Do not end application after cycle number Wal after control in seconds 30 Delay between two acquisitions in tenths of a second g Acquistion timer period m 1000 Cancel IT 28 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Nomi livelli E il nome che si vuole usare per il primo livello ad esempio Provincia Dal secondo livello in avanti i nomi dei livelli sono predefiniti perch corrispondono alla struttura degli impianti Selezionando le caselle di default vengono usati in nomi Livello 1 e Livello 2 Log Dardo Parameters Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings Timelut Duration Level Names Log Use default for Server Mew name for Server Server Cancel E possibile configurare il numero di record che si vogliono conservare nelllarchivio dei Log Eventi Segnalazioni 1 a selezione su Beep indica la presenza di un segnale acustico ad ogni registrazione
83. Funktionssatt Programmet DARDO PLUS PC LITE kan anv ndas enligt tv olika funktionss tt beroende p om f rv rvet ar aktivt eller inte e Om forvarvet r inaktivt och programmet har Oppnats med en administratorprofil kan man utfora andringar vad galler konfiguration strukturen m m e Viceversa om f rv rvet ar aktivt gar det inte att utf ra n gra ndringar p konfigurationen Kommunikationsportar Anl ggningen best r av styrenheter som man kopplat lampor till innan man definierar anl ggningen m ste programmet instrueras s att det kan se anl ggningen programmet ska man definiera vilken port bland alla lediga portar i datorn ska associeras till anl ggningen s att varje anlaggning forknippas till en specifk typ av anslutning som inte kan v xlas med andra Anslutningen kan vara en lokal seriell anslutning eller en fjarranslutning som utfors via Ethernet Om en RS232kabel anvands kommer det mellan datorn och styrenheterna att finnas ocks en RS232 RS485 omvandlare Om du anvander en RJ45 kabel och en anslutning till LAN natet m ste anlaggningen montera en Ethernet RS232 omvandlare Drift via Ethernet RS232 OMVANDLAREN ar till ten om man p datorn har installerat lamplig DRIVRUTIN se Handboken for Ethernet RS232 OMVANDLAREN Authorizations Options a Lar Lamp information New communications port Remove communications port Konfigurationsmenyn inneh ller tre undermenyer genom v
84. H re imech se otev e menu kter umo uje prov d t n sleduj c operace e P kazy 3 otev e menu mo n ch p kaz e Otev t d c jednotku 4 rovn se stisknut ipky p ej t na n sleduj c rove kter umo n zobrazit lampy kter jsou k n mu p ipojeny e Zru it d c jednotku 5 tato volba se rovn stisknut tla tka Zru it popsan ho v odstavci Ovl dac tla tka e Vlastnosti 6 zobrazuje informace o zvolen d c jednotce rovn se stisknut tla tka Vlastnosti v hlavn m okn popsan m v odstavci Ovl dac tla tka Druhy ovl dan ch d c ch jednotek Program DARDO PLUS PC LITE je schopen komunikovat s n sleduj c mi druhy d c ch jednotek o DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT d c jednotka pou van pro samonap jec lampy na n je mo n pl novat funk n testy a testy autonomie a nakonfigurovat jejich datum hodinu a pravideln opakov n jejich prov d n d c jednotka ur en k zen samonap jec ch lamp odes l p kazy jak z kl vesnice tak z zen a p ij m data o stavu lampy z zen T to d c jednotce je mo n odes lat interaktivn p kazy o DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM d c jednotka pou van pro samonap jec lampy na n je mo n pl novat funk n testy a testy autonomie a nakonfigurovat jejich datum hodinu a pra
85. Jo Description ko I 4 IE w Print graphics LL LL LL 20 Spacing 0 characters Select all 13 Remove selection Character Arial 10 Boldface Halics Printer Print Gurt 21 22 23 24 esquerda h uma lista das colunas list of fields da grade que se deseja imprimir poss vel seleccionar quais campos mandar imprimir com um clic do mouse no nome do campo Um outro clic desmarca a selec o 11 Os bot es Selecciona tudo Select all 12 e Desmarca selec o Remove selection 13 situados abaixo da lista permitem respectivamente seleccionar e desmarcar a selec o de todos os campos Na parte de cima vis vel o n mero de p ginas totais Total pages 14 e a p gina de in cio Print from page 15 e fim da impress o To page 16 que podem ser seleccionadas pelo utilizador Como o espa o ocupado pela linha de dados numa p gina varia de acordo com o tamanho da fonte da largura da p gina da orienta o da p gina s o poss veis casos em que a s rie de dados ocupe mais de uma linha na impress o A impress o dos campos escolhidos ser distribu da em v rias linhas da p gina de modo consecutivo O quadro Linhas em impress o por linha de dados Lines printing per row of data fornece o n mero de p ginas linhas necess rias 17 e o percentual de ocupa o da ltima Last line printing 18 O quadro de controlo Imprime gr fica Print graphics 19 deve ser seleccionado quando
86. L UNITS self contained lights these types of control units can be configured with a decimal address from 001 to 255 using random numbering e DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNITS RM remote controlled self contained lights these types of control units can be configured with a decimal address from 001 to 255 using random numbering Dardo Plus PC LITE EN 15 Schneider Electric DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT Self contained light control The DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT is used to control self contained lights Function and autonomy tests can be programmed on this control unit by configuring the date time and freguency Interactive commands can be transmitted to this control unit To insert the control unit click on the background and select Insert control unit A window opens and you can choose the type of unit to insert in the system Make the selection and define the control unit address then confirm the insertion by pressing OK In the background the synoptic panel corresponding to the selected control unit appears Synoptic panel DO Test in progress Delta The control unit has the following signals faulty 1 e Green if there are no faulty lights Yellow if the number of faulty lights is less than the threshold defined in the parameters Red if the number of faulty lights is greater than the threshold defined in the parameters Statuses 2 Green if none of the display signals indicate a fault Red if
87. Lagga till Ny anvandare User Permits E 1 User 01 8 Guest Generic Guest ES User 02 Administrator Manager New Permit E User name Password Contirm password Administrator Description ME Remove Modification uit f nstret Ny Beh righet mats in information som ska fylla de tre kolumnerna i listan Anvandarbehorigheter Anv ndarnamn 4 Niv dvs andministrat r eller standard anv ndare 5 Beskrivningen som matades in vid anv ndarens definition 6 N r administrat ren genererat sin profil med tillh rande l senord 7 samt l sernodet f r standard anv ndare m ste varje person som ska in p DARDO PLUS PC LITE anv nda dessa data F r att ta bort eller redigera ett namn m ste man f rst med muspekaren v lja nyckeln p kolumnen 8 till v nster om den specifika anv ndarens rad Byta losenord Change Password Old password pe New password Contirm new password Anvand menyn f r att latt och snabbt redigera losenordet f r den profil som du kommit in i programmet med Menyn Byta l senord r aktiv bara om man loggat in med en profil som ing r i Behorighetslistan For att andra losenordet m ste du mata in det gamla det nya och sedan bekr fta det senare SV 26 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Alternativ For att programmet ska kunna kora sina kontroller p basta sattet kan du andra antalet till tna uppkopplingsforsok antalet planerade uppkop
88. Le E WEE 2 F reskrifter OCH Valin daras 2 Forpackning ns inneha assediado dd EE ee EE NGEe 3 1 asis 4 Anlaggningens uppbyggnad lt z lt czz KEE KEE EK RE KEE KEE KEE KEE KEE KK ee 4 Hanterring av anlaggningar ue ee KEE KEREN KREE KEE KEE KEE KEE EK RK KR 4 Anv ndning av programvaran 2 scuz lt zz zzz zzz n uza nK KEE EE RE K KEE KEE KEE KK ee 5 F RSTA Sta loco i 5 we te EE 6 Avsluta Dr ON AMEL ess it NG 10 FUNKUONSS AUC Sn i one none C K L O ne 10 KOMMUNIKAUONS POMS asii 10 Infoga Ny kommunikationsport uer ek KK RK KEE KEE KEE KEE KEE KEE KK ee 11 Radera en kommunikattonsport uer enk enk Kn KE KE KE KEE KEE KEE KKK KKK KKK KEN 11 ATG Le Ce TO La Te H 12 Ntogda AAO O WEE 12 infoga st renh lss E 14 Hanterbara etvrenheter unner zz zzz zz zz zzz amu KREE KR KEE KEE KEE KREE E KEE Kee 15 Konfigurering av stvrenhetsaddresser uer ek KENE KEE KEE KEE EK RK Kee 15 DARDO PLUS SITRENAE RS e aa 16 DSYVIMDOISCNEING scr 16 ROMMANOON scared 16 DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM NA 21 SVNDOIS EE 21 KOMMAndON WE 21 Beh righet tillst nd E 25 Lista over DENOrigheter zz uci a 25 L gga till NY aNV Ndare isis 26 Byla loseno d E 26 CE l 1 EE LA E 27 COREME TT TO has os nues a 34 LIMPO Pausa 35 Information OM Berl EE 38 aee o o A NAM aaa 39 Schneider TP Electric Inledning Las detta avsnitt fore all annan dokumentation och innan du s tter igang med nagra som helst tg rder p invid utrustningen Bruksanvisn
89. NT CONSULTER LE MANUEL DU CONVERTISSEUR RS232 ETHERNET Suppression du port de communication Cette commande permet de supprimer si aucun syst me n est reli l un des ports de communication d finis dans le programme DARDO PLUS PC LITE Remove communications port EN Choose Com Port to Remove Cancel Remove Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider FR 11 Electric Systeme Entr e du systeme Apres avoir d fini le port de communication a utiliser pour le syst me et les caract ristiques qu il doit avoir il est possible d entrer le systeme et de commencer a d finir ses caract ristiques La fen tre affich e montre la liste des ports de communication parmi lesquels il est possible de choisir le port souhait la liste contient galement le port s lectionn pr c demment lors de la d finition du nouveau port de communication il faut choisir celui ci Input window ES Insert system Name NewhMame Choose a Port W Enable acquisition Description n Internal Contacta External Contacts Aller au niveau Systeme en cliquant sur l arri re plan avec le bouton droit de la souris s lectionner Insert system entrer systeme une fen tre s ouvre demandant la configuration du port de communication ainsi que toutes les descriptions qui rendent le systeme univoque e Entrer le nom du syst me dans la case de texte appel e Name nom e S lectionner un port de communication encore inutilis p
90. O Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M arp required _ Default amp dministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M Lamp required Default dministrator EE U e DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 8 53 46 Default amp dministrator Control unit route LEVEL SERVER First FloorDardo Plus 1 Number of records i 1 pe E vm EEE 10 Nombre d v nements 1 affiche le nombre d v nements du journal Bouton de Sauvegarde 2 presser ce bouton pour sauvegarder une copie du contenu de la grille du journal visualis e La copie du contenu est sauvegard e dans le dossier portant le nom du programme Le fichier sappelle log txt Les champs sont s par s par par cons quent il s agit d un format utilisable aussi avec MS Excel Le bouton Delete suppression 3 permet de supprimer tous les enregistrements s lectionn s En d placant la souris sur les enregistrements lignes de message et en maintenant press e la touche CTRL il est possible d augmenter le nombre de champs s lectionn s Pour s lectionner tous les enregistrements sans devoir les s lectionner un par un il suffit de presser d abord le bouton Select all tout s lectionner 8 Le bouton Notes 4 permet d associer un commentaire a un ou plusieurs champs Il est possible de s lectionner les enregistrements en maintenant enfonc e la touche CTRL et en cliquant avec le bouton gauche de la souris sur le bord gau
91. P Name Description O 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERWER First M LOBO Lamprequired O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVER First M A Jlamprequied O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVERT First ON Jlamprequied O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERVER First ii Jlamprequied Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVER First II Jlamprequied Detault dministator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVERI First ON L mprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 24 SERVER First II D Jlamprequied Default inistrator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First ON BB L mprequired Default inistrator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First II Pi Jlamprequied Deiadbdntrtialo 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First M BY Lampreguied Detault dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 23 SERVER First ON BB Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First O A lampreguied Detault dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVERI First mi D Lamprequied Default dministrahor 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVERI First mi meet Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 23 SERVER First II PU Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 06 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First Mf BO Jlamprequied Deiadbbdntrtiso 91 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First ON meet Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M BA Lamprequired Default
92. R THE PRINTER DEFINED ON THE CONTROL PANEL EN 42 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric The Search 6 button is used to select a subset of events displayed on the record grid 25 Log search System Control inf SERVER First Floor DE DI IDP i 48 Event hype Event Corral uni D I Coammunie stian Errar Liter NE rom Ta f ff ff Mabe Ca I 30 Type of events recorded A Search can involve a set of two or more criteria combined in any way For example by selecting a system name 25 from the list of control units 26 only those belonging to that system will be found along with any list of linked lights 27 If a list is not selected then all events are included There are four types of event 28 Communication errors Program functioning errors Control unit events Light events Control unit and light events are the record of status changes for the relevant features 29 Use the error list 30 to select only error events or only information events Use the user list to select only the events linked to a specific user 31 From To is used to select the records from a period 32 Message is used to select records with the same description 33 Notes is used to select records with a linked note 34 Dardo Plus PC LITE EN 43 Schneider Table des matieres INTFOGUCTION EEN 1 Manuel d instructions EEEEEREEREEEREER RER EER EE EER EE EEN EEE EE E ENEE EN 1 A GU
93. RDO PLUS permettant ainsi la surveillance d un syst me de lampes sur une grande chelle L application permet a l utilisateur de g rer contr ler et programmer le fonctionnement des diff rents postes DARDO PLUS PC LITE donne la possibilit de lancer des commandes interactives gui offrent les m mes fonctions gue celles des panneaux des postes Les r sultats des tests et les ventuelles d faillances des syst mes contr l s sont enregistr s par le programme DARDO PLUS PC LITE l op rateur peut ainsi rechercher et imprimer les v nements saisis Plus plus de d tails sur les caract ristiques des diff rents postes consulter le paragraphe Types de postes g r s FR 4 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric Utilisation du logiciel Premier d marrage Dans le menu D marrer du syst me d exploitation s lectionner le menu Programmes puis le groupe de programmes SCHNEIDER ouvrir ensuite le dossier Dardo Plus PC Lite a condition que le parcours et ou le nom n ait pas t chang en cours d installation et lancer le programme DARDO PLUS PC LITE Lorsque le programme d marre la fen tre suivante apparait Dardo PC Lite XXX Enter User Hame and Password User name password se E Pour acc der au programme il est n cessaire d entrer un nom d utilisateur et un mot de passe Donn es de d marrage du programme s lectionner User name Nom d utilisateur 1 gt Admin Password Mot de passe
94. RVER First II Jlamprequied Detault dministator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVERI First ON L mprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 24 SERVER First II D Jlamprequied Default inistrator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First ON BB L mprequired Default inistrator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First II Pi Jlamprequied Deiadbdntrtialo 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First M BY Lampreguied Detault dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 23 SERVER First ON BB Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First O A lampreguied Detault dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First mi Jlamprequiedo Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVERI First mi meet Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 23 SERVER First II Jlamprequied Deiadbdntrtsialo 31 06 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First Mf BO Jlamprequied Deiadbbdntrtiso 91 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First ON meet Default dministrator 314082007 9 03 21 SERVERI Fast M Alemprequied Default dministrater 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVERT First ii fame S Pla 31 08 2007 8 0321 SERVER First Mo D Lamprequied O Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERT First ml D Lamprequired _________Defaukkdministato _ 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERI First M A Lamprequired Default dministrator 3170872007 3 03 20 SERVER First O Lampreguied DefaultAdministat
95. RVER First ON meet Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M BA Lamprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVERT First ON Lamprequied Defaul dministrator 31 06 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First II Se Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERI First mi Z L mprequired Detaull dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERT First II D Jlamprequied JDetaut dministator 51 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERI First ON 2 pred Delauk dministratar 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M 2 Lampreguied O 1 Defaul amp dministatoo 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERI First ON amp required DefaultAdministrater AA as a 3108 2007 9 03 18 SERVERT First O efault dministrator 317082007 3 03 18 SERVERI Pal of 31 0872007 8 5346 D 31 08 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M Di DefaultAdministratar D a i Login Default amp dministrator Default amp dministrator Control unit route LEVEL SERVER First FloorDardo Plus 1 Number of records peso C vm EEE Sloupky zleva doprava obsahuj n sleduj c data Datum a hodinu zaznamen n ud losti pou it zkr cen form t data z ovl dac ho panelu 2 N zev syst mu 3 Nepou ito 4 Adresa d c jednotky 5 Nepou ito 6 Nepou ito 7 slo lampy Dardo plus Control Unit 8 N zev p i az
96. RVER Fist M o J Di Lamprequired Default dministratar 31 06 2007 9 03 24 SERVERI First M B Lamprequired O _ Defaul amp dministrator 3108 2007 9 03 23 SERVER Fist M D Lamprequired Default dministratar 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERWER First MJ o o D Lampreqguired O Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First M B Lamprequired Default dministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First M EE Lamprequired O Default amp dministrator 3108 2007 9 03 23 SERVER Fist M Di Lampreguied Defaults dirinistratnr _ 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M D tru Default amp dministrator 3109 2007 9 03 21 SERVERI First MoO S Lampreguiied Defaulk amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M o o S O tru Default amp dministrator 31708 2007 9 03 21 SERVERI First mM LLemprened o o Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M D Lamprequired Default amp dministrator 312082007 9 03 20 SERVER First mM B Lamprequired _ o Default amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M o O J Sa Lamprequired O Default amp dministrator 314082007 9 03 20 SERVERI Fist Ot B Lamp regured O Defaul amp dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M o D i Lamprequiredo _ Default amp dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERWER Fist M E Lamp regured
97. S adressestell lt oc dO Ea a ica asc ho us ins 1 Importance du manuel 1 Conservation Kauza ae oa ia 1 Pictogrammes TT 2 MISES Cll Cal GG sms A PGE ro aa 2 Contenu de Fembalage smart aaa ana MEN ANA 3 informations LEE 4 Ale EUR leif TEE TE 4 GESTION BET 4 UtiISAtiOn GU IOGICIEI siria 5 Premier DE de LE 5 Sid Idea UE 6 oo on 10 Modes de fonctionnement n 10 Ports de communication asian sds raio dd dd nn cite 10 Entr e d un nouveau port de communication uneneen eu Ku Ka KE KEE KEE Ke 11 Suppression du port de COMMUNICATION sssmmnnmnnmanmmnmmnnmenneun 11 ET sasnissaissiis idas adiadas ag isa aC anda add ns dida 12 ENUEG GU Sy STO EE 12 Entr e des E E E E 14 TYPES dE POSTOS GETOS en a 15 Configuration des adresses des postes zzzzzzzzzzzz zzzz zz z 222220 15 DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT saran sei ri 16 dulde TE 16 Bei al ua TEEN 16 DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RN eer KK K E 21 SVNODUGUC aia a 21 Beil Elle TT 21 E de IN E en EE 25 LISTE EH de Tu EE 25 Entree d un nouvel utilisateur seu ana aaa 26 Modifier le mot de passe sussa cine 26 KEE 27 ACQUISITO sis ada a dd 34 Biet EE 35 informations ul sicarios 38 v nements ee EE 39 Schneider EP Electric Introduction Il est n cessaire de lire cette section avant toute autre documentation et avant deffectuer nimporte quelle op ration sur le produit Manuel d instructions A qui s adresse t il Ce manuel s adresse a des installateurs comp tents qu
98. Warnings Description Control Acquisition Apres avoir entr dans le programme le systeme et les postes gui le composent il n est pas n cessaire d entrer les lampes reli es aux postes Apres avoir termin la configuration il suffit de lancer un cycle d acquisition pour pouvoir visualiser les synoptiques des lampes reli es tout en ayant a disposition une liste des lampes reli es et non reli es Non seulement l acquisition a lieu de facon automatique selon les ch ances d finies pendant la configuration mais elle peut galement tre lanc e manuellement N B ll existe une condition qui entra ne le lancement automatigue du cycle d acquisition ind pendamment de la volont de l op rateur si le mot de passe n est pas entr en temps utile lors du d marrage du programme on accede a ce dernier en tant qu invit et un cycle d acquisition d marre simultan ment est possible de lancer manuellement le cycle d acquisition l aide du bouton 1 Lancer l acquisition Cette commande permet d acqu rir les donn es concernant les objets de tous les systemes reli s au PC Le bouton Lancer l acquisition est d crit dans le paragraphe Boutons de commande RO Pour effectuer l acquisition uniquement des donn es des objets reli s a un poste cliguer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le synoptique d un poste s lectionn dans tous les modes de contr le s lectionner la rubrique Commandes
99. a sullo schermo Il tipo di oggetto inserito dipende dal livello in cui ci si trova permette di cancellare l oggetto selezionato sullo schermo permette di visualizzare le propriet dell oggetto selezionato sullo schermo permette di dare il via all acquisizione permette di interrompere l acquisizione In tal caso tutti i comandi pendenti sulle centraline sono eliminati permette di uscire dal programma avendo prima arrestato l acquisizione e Pulsante Ripristino Database 7 e Pulsante Backup Database 8 e Icona Compattazione 9 Dardo Plus PC LITE carica l ultima copia del database dalla sottocartella tempbck della directory di installazione Premendo il pulsante il programma viene chiuso per consentire il caricamento dei dati al successivo riavvio riavviare il programma come descritto ed inserire la password salva una copia del database nel momento in cui viene premuto La copia viene salvata nella sottocartella tempbck della directory di installazione ed il file si chiama dardoLite mdb In automatico a programma aperto viene fatta una copia di backup del database ogni ora icona normalmente non visibile Compare quando il database supera 5MByte e non stata eseguita la compattazione da pi di 1 settimana La compattazione si esegue con un solo clic Premendo il pulsante il programma viene chiuso per consentire al programma stesso di scollegarsi dal database riavviare il programma come desc
100. a da scegliere Input window E Insert system Name Neweblame Choose a Port W Enable acquisition Description Es Internal Contacts External Contacts Posizionandosi al livello Impianto e cliccando sullo sfondo con il pulsante destro del mouse si seleziona Inserisci impianto si apre la finestra che richiede l impostazione della porta di comunicazione e tutte le descrizioni necessarie a rendere l impianto univoco o Inserire il nome dell impianto nella casella di testo denominata Nome e Scegliere una porta di comunicazione non ancora utilizzata tra quelle elencate nella finestra di dialogo Scegliere una porta Selezionare l opzione Abilita acquisizione per consentire l acquisizione dati dall impianto Inserire la descrizione dell impianto nella casella di testo Descrizione opzionale e Inserire i Referenti Interni ed i Referenti Esterni nelle caselle di testo dedicate opzionale Negli spazi relativi a Descrizione e Referenti si potranno inserire ad esempio l indirizzo dell impianto ed i nomi del personale addetto alla manutenzione Una volta inseriti i dati richiesti e confermato con OK l impianto visualizzato sulla finestra principale Assicurarsi che il riquadro abilita acquisizione sia selezionato IT 12 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Gli impianti vengono visualizzati con un lungo rettangolo avente nella parte sinistra il nome ed un quadrato 7 che assume un colore div
101. a port Seleccionar a op o Habilita aquisi o Enable acquisition para permitir a aquisi o de dados da instala o e Inserir a descric o da instalac o no espaco referente a Descric o Description opcional e Inserir as Refer ncias Internas Internal Contacts e as Refer ncias Externas External Contacts nos respectivos espacos opcional Nos espacos relativos a Descric o e Refer ncias podem ser inseridos por exemplo o endereco da instala o e os nomes das pessoas encarregadas da manuten o Ao inserir os dados pedidos e confirmar com OK a instala o visualizada na janela principal Assegurar se de que o quadro Habilita aquisi o Enable acquisition esteja seleccionado PT 12 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider As instalac es s o visualizadas num rect ngulo comprido gue tem na parte esguerda o nome e um quadrado 7 que assume uma cor diferente de acordo com o estado da instalac o As cores que identificam o estado s o e Lampejante Preto Cinza quando a instalac o ainda nao foi configurada e adquirida e Lampejante Cinza Vermelho se um dos objectos do pr ximo nivel tem uma das sinaliza es vermelhas ou amarelas e Verde se todos os objectos do pr ximo nivel tiverem sinalizac es verdes File Configuration Authorizations Options E Schneider Open System Remove System Properties Ao clicar num objecto da insta
102. a relativamente ai cicli di acquisizione Il valore 1 indica che viene eseguita l acquisizione dei dati della centralina ogni volta che viene eseguito un ciclo di acquisizione Il valore 2 indica che viene eseguita l acquisizione dei dati della centralina ogni due cicli di acquisizione Il valore O indica che non viene mai eseguita l acquisizione dei dati della centralina Selezionando nel punto 3 possibile avere un campo note di descrizione arbitrario per l operatore Selezionando nel punto 4 possibile all operatore cambiare l indirizzo della centralina supervisionata Stato DARDO PLUS RM 1 General Status Test M Inhibition Test Restore Utility Short eye Faut Emergency Communication Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider BP Electric IT 23 IT 24 Inibizione 1 Test 2 Restore 3 Utility 4 Corto circuito linea Dardo eye 5 Anomalia 6 Emergenza 7 Comunicazione 8 test di autonomia e funzionali sia a calendario che manuali sono inibiti All ingresso di comando ho la presenza di un segnale 24Vdc e per il tempo in cui rimane attivo tale segnale la centralina invia il comando di test alle lampade Ne segue che la durata differenzia un test funzionale da test di autonomia All ingresso di comando ho la presenza di un segnale 24Vdc e rilevata la transizione tra segnale assente e segnale pres
103. ad se zobraz synoptick panel odpov daj c zvolen d c jednotce Synoptick panel DP DM W Broken O States O Test in progress W Delta d c jednotka pod v n sleduj c informace z vadn ch 1 e Zelen jestli e neexistuj dn z vadn lampy Zlut jestli e je po et z vadn ch lamp ni ne limit stanoven v parametrech Cerven jestli e je po et z vadn ch lamp vy ne uveden limit Stavy 2 e Zelena v pripad ze Informace na displeji nepopisuj dn anom ln situace e Cerven v p pad e se vyskytly anom ln situace jako chyby v komunikaci stav utility stav rest anom lie pohotovost zablokovan testy zkrat na ovl dac lince lamp e Zlut v opa n m p pad Pr v prob h test 3 e erven test pr v prob h Zelen dn test Delta 4 e erven jestli e rozd l mezi datem a hodinou na PC a na d c jednotce p es hl hodnotu nastavenou v parametrech s Zelen v opa n m p pad Parametr Delta ozna uje e datum a hodina proveden test neodpov daj nastaven v programu P kazy K dispozici jsou n sleduj c p kazy Sb r dat 1 spou t cyklus sb ru dat z d c jednotky o Nastaven data a hodiny 2 datum a hodina z PC odeslan do d c jednotky Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 21 Electric Controls on control unit 2
104. alled dardoLite mdb The database can also be saved by pressing the Backup database button The recorded events are linked to program functioning for example e Program opening and closing e Communication status e Change in status of lights or control units Signals can be either errors or warnings Double click on the bar 1 displaying the last warning or error to open the event management window located in the lower part of the screen o EZ This page can be used to search for logs and print them If an event is detected the program signals that the event has been recorded and emits a beep configurable as an option in the Options Parameters Log menu As well as this acoustic signal a red triangle appears on the line of the Event log box This signal remains until an operator presses the Acknowledge key in the Event log menu Events search EEN Login Default amp dministrator Double click the error log box 1 to display the log record management window Dardo Plus PC LITE EN 39 Schneider Electric Event log Date System M Cont Lil Lon LamDP Name Description O 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERWER First M LOBO Lamprequired O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVER First M A Jlamprequied O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVERT First ON Jlamprequied O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERVER First ii Jlamprequied Default dmi
105. ance family 4 no qual poss vel escolher ou mudar a fam lia a qual pertence e a imagem a associar l mpada opcional Ao clicar na tecla 5 poss vel atribuir uma descric o a l mpada 011411 Plant Schneider General Technical Data Status Number fr Mame Everiux R40 E Family Change family Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Electric L ngua Language File Configuration Authorizations Maite C gt mj Modify parameters Warnings Atrav s deste menu poss vel mudar a l ngua usada Ao seleccionar a op o L ngua aparece uma janela com as bandeiras dos v rios pa ses um clic do mouse na bandeira define a l ngua do p is correspondente Language Avisos Warnings File Configuration Authorizations Mie al pre Modify parameters i Language Warnings Atrav s deste menu poss vel acessar uma janela na qual pode se inserir uma lista de avisos que aparecer o na barra 1 onde s o visualizados os eventos erros sinalizac es com a periodicidade definida Uma ferramenta importante para as instala es se tiverem que ser programadas limpezas dos aparelhos ou interven es de manuten o No final do aviso ser o visualizados o erro ou a sinaliza o na barra 1 e o System Level Login Default amp dministrator Dardo Plus PC LITE PT 33 Schneider Warnings Description Control
106. ands can be transmitted to this control unit Click on the background and select Insert control unit a window opens where you can choose the type of unit to insert in the system Having made the selection define the control unit address and confirm the insertion by pressing the OK button In the background the synoptic panel corresponding to the selected control unit appears Synoptic panel DP DM W Broken O States O Test in progress W Delta The control unit has the following signals ofaulty 1 Green if there are no faulty lights Yellow if the number of faulty lights is less than the threshold defined in the parameters Red if the number of faulty lights is greater than the threshold Statuses 2 Green if none of the display signals indicate a fault e Red if there are faults such as communication errors utility mode rest mode faulty status emergency status test disabled status or short circuit status on the light control line e Red if the opposite is the case Test in progress 3 e Red test in progress Green no test Delta 4 Red if the difference in date and time between the PC and the control unit is greater than the value set in the parameters Green if the opposite is the case The Delta indicates whether the date and time of the control units do not match the program settings Commands The following commands are available Acquisitio
107. ant Pr klad nakonfigurovan lampy kter nereaguje CS 36 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric 01152 Plant P klad lampy en ovl dan DARDO PLUS mimo autonomii Dardo Pus POTE o Mede CS37 Electric Informace o lamp ch Po spu t n cyklu sb ru dat kter umo n zobrazit synoptick panely p ipojen ch lamp se rovn zobraz seznam p ipojen ch a nep ipojen ch lamp Po ukon en sb ru dat je mo n zaz lohovat zji t n informace do textov ho souboru File Kam Authorizations Options Lamp information New communications port Remove communications pork Substitute modem V tomto menu po proveden sb ru dat je mo n zobrazovat informace o lamp ch zji t n b hem p ipojen Information System 02 gt 01 Control unit route Level O4 Dardo Plus 1 Lamps inserted 41 OD 1 Ti nf Grip LD Save Tile Okno poskytuje nasledujici informace Lampy kter syst m zjistil b hem p ipojen 1 Cisla lamp kter Ize p ipojit 2 Funkce z lohov n t chto dat do textov ho souboru 3 CS 38 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Ud losti Zaznamen v n ud lost Program zaznamen v v echny ud losti do datab ze se strukturou FIFO tj prvn zaznamenan ud lost bude po vy erp n prostoru k dispozici smaz na jako prvn Po et ud lost k uchov n ur uje prostor kter bude k d
108. armi ceux qui sont indigu s dans la fen tre de dialogue Choose a port Choisir un port e S lectionner l option Enable acquisition Activer l acquisition pour pouvoir acqu rir les donn es depuis le syst me e Entrer la description du syst me dans la case de texte Description en option e Entrer les contacts internes et externes dans les cases de texte d di es Internal contacts et External contacts en option Dans les espaces correspondant Description et Contacts il est possible par exemple dentrer l adresse du syst me et les noms des personnes charg es de la maintenance Quand les donn es requises ont t entr es et confirm es avec OK le syst me appara t sur la fen tre principale S assurer que la case Enable acquisition Activer l acquisition est bien coch e FR 12 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Le syst me est visualis de la facon suivante un long rectangle avec a gauche le nom et un carr 7 dont la couleur change selon l tat du syst me Les couleurs indiquant l tat sont les suivantes e Couleur clignotante noire grise quand le syst me n a pas encore t configur ni acquis e Couleur clignotante grise rouge quand un des objets du niveau suivant pr sente une des signalisations rouges ou jaunes e Couleur verte si tous les objets du niveau suivant pr sentent uniquement des signalisations vertes Configuration Authorizations Opt
109. artie sup rieure le sigle qui identifie le poste et une s rie de LEDs dont la couleur change selon l tat du poste Lorsque l acquisition commence l tat des LEDs pr sents sur le synoptique est mis a jour Les couleurs des LEDs correspondant aux diff rents tats sont les suivantes grise rouge jaune et verte Consulter le fascicule sp cifigue a chaque poste pour conna tre la signification des couleurs En cliquant sur le synoptique d un poste le contour de l encadr devient bleu pour signaler la s lection effectu e FR 14 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider DF 1 Broken ES States amp Test in progress Delta Commands Open Control Unit Remove Control Unit Properties Cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le synoptique d un poste s lectionn dans tous les modes de contr le pour faire apparaitre un menu qui permet d effectuer les op rations suivantes e Commandes 3 ouvre le menu des commandes possibles e Ouvrir le poste 4 quivaut a un clic sur la fleche passer au niveau sup rieur pour visualiser les lampes qui lui sont attribu es e Supprimer le poste 5 s lectionn guivaut a un clic sur le bouton Supprimer d crit au paragraphe Boutons de commande e Propri t s 6 visualise les informations sur le poste s lectionn ce qui equivaut a un clic sur le bouton Propri t s pr sent sur la fen tre principale
110. ate DRIVER has been installed on the PC see Ethernet RS232 CONVERTER Manual Authorizations Options Su Lar Lamp information New communications port Remove communications pork The configuration menu has three submenus to insert remove and or modify the type of communication between PC and system e New communication port 1 e Remove communication port 2 EN 10 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Electric Inserting a new communication port Mew communications port x Choose communications Port 1200 E 72 Use this menu to insert a new communication port from those on the PC in the program configuration The program displays a list of serial ports from COM1 to COM256 1 Use the mouse to select a port The fixed communications parameters used are shown at the bottom of the window Remember that for systems DARDO PLUS PC LITE can only use the serial ports configured within the program and not all those present in Windows CAUTION 4 THE NEW SERIAL PORT MUST BE INSERTED WHILE INSTALLING DARDO PLUS PC LITE ON D THE SUPERVISION PC CAUTION ud CONNECTION USING AN RS232 ETHERNET CONVERTER IS POSSIBLE IF THE q COMMUNICATION DRIVER HAS PREVIOUSLY BEEN INSTALLED SEE RS232 ETHERNET CONVERTER MANUAL Removing a communication port Use this command to remove a communication port defined in Dardo PLUS PC LITE You cannot remove a port if it is connected to a system Remove c
111. bjet au moins a t entr dans le niveau o on se trouve apo 11 25 25 Cases d tat System Level Level 1 Heu ame ardo Plus 1 III Les cases d tat pr sentent les encadr s suivants Niveau 1 Indique le niveau visualis Le Niveau 1 visualise les syst mes le niveau syst me Niveau 2 visualise les diff rents postes le niveau poste Niveau 3 visualise les diff rentes lampes Enregistrement du dernier v nement A Une ic ne 2 s affiche a c t de la visualisation de l enregistrement du dernier v nement Le logo change selon le type d v nement si l ic ne devient un triangle rouge 3 elle signale qu un v nement d erreur non encore reconnu a t enregistr Dans ce cas la DARDO PLUS PC LITE met galement un signal sonore p riodique si la configuration correspondante est activ e FR 8 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric o Date et heure de la derni re acquisition 4 Parcours complet du nom du poste dont on est en train d acquerir les donnees 5 Etat de l acquisition B e 6 Lic ne visualise une horloge quand l acquisition effectue un cycle d attente de la requ te e 7 Lic ne visualise une lampe et le groupe de lampes en cas d acquisition de l tat des lampes e 8 Lic ne visualise un cercle rouge en cas d acquisition de l tat du poste e 9 Lic ne visualise une main pressant un bouton quand DARDO PLUS PC LITE envoie une
112. che de la grille Les enregistrements avec une note ont un ast risque au d but de la description Le bouton Identify reconna tre 7 limine l ic ne rouge pr sente dans la case 1 et le bip ventuel qui indique que l v nement a t reconnu en d autres termes il limine V tat de d faillance du syst me Control unit rouge parcours poste 10 indique a quel systeme est reli le poste s lectionn dans le tableau Le bouton Print imprimer 5 permet d imprimer les donn es s lectionn es sur la grille Une fen tre pour s lectionner l imprimante appara t avant la fen tre d impression proprement dite Pour imprimer il est obligatoire de s lectionner une imprimante mais il est possible de sortir sans imprimer l aide de la touche Close quitter 9 Dardo Plus PC LITE FR 41 Schneider Val Printer settings List of fields Total pages Print fram page To page ma T 16 lill Lines printing per row of data gt 1 7 SER Last line printin Jo Description ko I 4 IE w Print graphics LL LL LL 20 Spacing 0 characters Select all 13 Remove selection Character Arial 10 Boldface Halics Printer Print Chart 21 22 23 24 Sur la gauche se trouve une liste des colonnes de la grille a imprimer Il est possible de s lectionner les champs a imprimer en cliguant avec la souris sur le nom du champ Un autre clic limine la s lection 11 Les boutons
113. cionar o ponto 3 poss vel ter um campo arbitr rio de notas descritivas para o operador Ao seleccionar o ponto 4 poss vel ao operador mudar o endereco da central supervisionada Estado DARDO PLUS RM 1 Test Utility Faut General Status Test Inhibition Restore Short eye Emergency Communication Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider PT 23 PT 24 Inibic o 1 Teste 2 Restore Restabelece 3 Utility Servico 4 Curto circuito linha Dardo eye 5 Anomalia 6 Emerg ncia 7 Comunicac o 8 Os testes de autonomia e de funcionamento tanto os definidos por calend rio como os manuais est o inibidos Na entrada do comando h um sinal 24Vdc e enquanto este sinal permanece activo a central envia o comando de teste as lampadas consequentemente a durac o diferencia um teste de funcionamento de um teste de autonomia Na entrada do comando ha um sinal 24Vdc e ao detectar a transic o entre sinal ausente e sinal presente a central envia o comando de RESTORE as l mpadas Na entrada do comando ha um sinal 24Vdc e ao detectar a transic o entre sinal ausente e sinal presente a central envia o comando de Utility inibic o da emerg ncia A linha de comunicagao com as lampadas esta em curto circuto As lampadas
114. conectadas apresentaram uma anomalia no Teste Algumas ou todas as lampadas configuradas comunicaram a central a aus ncia de rede el ctrica para recarga Detectado um erro de comunicac o serial A condic o de sinal activo existe quando o quadrado ao lado da escrita esta seleccionado Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Permissoes Os utilizadores que usam o programa podem ser administradores ou utilizadores gen ricos cada um tem a sua senha O administrador pode intervir em qualquer func o o convidado tem um n mero limitado de possibilidades de intervenc o pode iniciar a aguisic o dos dados ou interromp la visualizar as notas j inseridas e reconhecer os eventos File Configuration Aia Options Atrav s deste menu poss vel efectuar todas as operac es de gest o dos utilizadores habilitados para o programa O menu Permiss es Authorizations cont m dois submenus e Lista de Permiss es List of authorizations 1 Muda senha Change password 2 Lista de Permiss es User Permits jsem oa esmo SB EE J Generic Guest Administrator Manager Remove Modification A janela visualizada caso se deseje inserir um novo utilizador new 1 remover remove 2 ou modificar modification 3 a lista dos utilizadores ja habilitados ao uso do DARDO PLUS PC LITE Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider PT 25 d Electric Inserc o de um Novo Utilizador User Permits E 1 User 01 8 Guest Gen
115. contorno 1 mais grosso em relac o aos outros o E Sinalizac es do sin ptico v lidas para todas as centrais A barra colorida 2 presente em baixo no sin ptico indica o estado da l mpada e pode assumir cores diferentes e Lampejante Preto Cinza guando a l mpada est configurada mas n o est presente na configurac o da central Cinza quando a l mpada est presente na configura o mas n o responde e Vermelho se a l mpada est danificada Amarelo se a l mpada est sem autonomia Verde nos outros casos isto tudo OK Dardo Plus PC LITE PT 35 Schneider Exemplo de l mpada OK ap s um teste de funcionamento 01411 Plant Schneider General Technical Data Status L mpadas controladas pela UNIDADE DE CONTROLO DARDO PLUS Al m das indica es j fornecidas antes a barra 1 pode assumir outras cores 01152 Plant Exemplo de lampada configurada que n o responde PT 36 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Exemplo de l mpada controlada pelo DARDO PLUS sem autonomia 01152 Plant Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider PT 37 d Electric Informagoes das Lampadas Lamp information Depois de ter iniciado um ciclo de aquisic o que permite visualizar os sin pticos das l mpadas torna se disponivel tamb m uma lista das l mpadas conectadas e nao conectadas No final da aguisic o poss vel salvar as informa es adquiridas num ficheiro de texto Fil
116. corresponding to each of them The administrator can intervene on any function the guest has a limited number of intervention possibilities he can start or stop data acquisition display notes already entered and acknowledge events File Configuration gt 5 ti agp dra e Options List of authorizations Change password This menu is used to manage all the users authorised to use the program The Authorisations menu contains two submenus List of Authorisations 1 Change Password 2 List of authorisations User Permits User name Level Description Guest Generic Guest i Administrator Manager Remove Modification The window is displayed if you want to insert a new user 1 or remove 2 or modify 3 the list of users already authorised to use DARDO PLUS PC LITE Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider EN 25 Electric Inserting a new user User Permits E 1 User 01 8 Guest Generic Guest ES User 02 Administrator Manager New Permit E User name Password Contirm password Administrator Description ME Remove Modification uit In the New Authorisation window insert the information in the three columns of the User Authorisations list User name 4 Level i e administrator or general user 5 Description supplied when the user is defined 6 Once the administrator has created his own profile with corresponding password 7 and those of the genera
117. ctric Propri t s g n rales DARDO PLUS 1 General Status Test Marne Dardo Plus 1 es Address Acquisition cycles 4 O ee NES Notes La selection du point 1 permet d attribuer un nom au poste La s lection du point 2 donne la possibilit l op rateur de changer la fr quence d acquisition du poste surveill Le param tre Acquisition cycles cycles d acquisition est configur initialement sur la valeur 1 Ce parametre indique la frequence d acquisition des donn es du poste relativement aux cycles d acquisition La valeur 1 indique que acquisition des donn es du poste a lieu chaque fois qu un cycle d acquisition est effectu La valeur 2 indique que l acquisition des donn es du poste a lieu tous les deux cycles d acquisition La valeur 0 indique que l acquisition des donn es du poste na jamais lieu En s lectionnant le point 3 il est possible d avoir un champ o l op rateur peut entrer des notes La s lection du point 4 donne la possibilit a l op rateur de changer l adresse du poste surveill FR 18 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider tat e Inhibition 1 Les tests dautonomie et de fonctionnement aussi bien programm s que manuels sont inhib s e Test de fonctionnement 2 Les lampes reli es pouvant accepter la commande sont en cours de test de fonctionnement e Test d autonomie pair 3 Les lampes paires reli es pouvant accepter la commande sont en cours
118. d g Acquisition timer period m2 1000 FR 28 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Level names noms des niveaux Il s agit du nom que l on souhaite utiliser pour le premier niveau par exemple Province A partir du deuxieme niveau les noms des niveaux sont pr tablis car ils correspondent a la structure des systemes Les cases pr sentent par d faut les noms Niveau 1 et Niveau 2 Dardo Parameters Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta settings Timelut Duration Level Names Log Use default for Server Mew name for Server Server Cancel Log journal Il est possible de configurer le nombre d enregistrements a conserver dans le fichier des Journaux Ev nements Signalisations 1 La s lection de Beep bip indique la pr sence d un signal sonore a chaque enregistrement son utilisation est facultative 2 Dardo Parameters X Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings TimeUut Duration Level Names Log Maximum number of log 5000 1 Beep To 2 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider FR 29 Electric Acquisition attempts tentatives d acquisition C est le nombre de tentatives de connexion aux systemes pour l acquisition des donn es effectu es par le programme DARDO PLUS PC LITE avant qu un tat d erreur de communication ne soit signal Le nombre de tentatives configurable va de 6 mini a 20 maxi Dardo Parameters TimeOut Durati
119. d Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist M o J Di Lamprequired Default dministratar 31 06 2007 9 03 24 SERVERI First M B Lamprequired O _ Defaul amp dministrator 3108 2007 9 03 23 SERVER Fist M D Lamprequired Default dministratar 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERWER First MJ o o D Lampreqguired O Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First M B Lamprequired Default dministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First M EE Lamprequired O Default amp dministrator 3108 2007 9 03 23 SERVER Fist M Di Lampreguied Defaults dirinistratnr _ 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M D tru Default amp dministrator 3109 2007 9 03 21 SERVERI First MoO S Lampreguiied Defaulk amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M o o S O tru Default amp dministrator 31708 2007 9 03 21 SERVERI First mM LLemprened o o Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M D Lamprequired Default amp dministrator 312082007 9 03 20 SERVER First mM B Lamprequired _ o Default amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M o O J Sa Lamprequired O Default amp dministrator 314082007 9 03 20 SERVERI Fist Ot B Lamp regured O Defaul amp dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M o D i Lamprequiredo _ Default amp dministrator 31 08 200
120. d Delta Maximum delta of counters in minutes Current value 10 Mew value 10 a Log Settings Settings param trages En cochant la case Tooltip images Infobulle images il est possible d associer une image graphique a chaque objet poste ou Lampe Dardo Parameters TimeOut Duration Level Names Log Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Iw Tooltip images Server Settings Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Electric FR 31 Exemple de positionnement du curseur a proximit de l ic ne DARDO PLUS Exemple de positionnement du curseur a proximit de l ic ne de lampe s lectionn e voir le bord bleu plus pais Pour associer une image a une lampe il faut 1 2 3 FR 32 Positionner le curseur sur le synoptique de la lampe Cliquer sur celui ci pour faire apparaitre le menu Propri t s Cliquer sur le menu pour ouvrir la fen tre Propri t s Lampe 1 Le fait de cliquer sur le menu Propri t s quivaut a un clic sur le bouton Propri t s pr sent sur la fen tre principale et d crit dans le paragraphe Boutons de commande Dans la fen tre Propri t s Lampe s lectionner le dossier G n ral 2 Le clic sur le bouton 3 de la chaine Famille fait appara tre la fen tre Modifier famille 4 o il est possible de modifier la famille d appartenance et image a associer la lampe en option Cliquer sur l
121. das quando adquire o estado das l mpadas e 8 O cone mostra um c rculo vermelho quando adquire o estado da central e 9 O cone mostra uma m o a pressionar uma tecla quando o DARDO PLUS PC LITE envia um comando central Porta de comunica o C e Icone da comunica o directa em serial RS485 icone que sintetiza os cabos de conex o serial 10 cone de aguisic o activa 12 o led verde se a aquisic o est activa vermelho se a aquisic o est desactivada Quadro que indica o estado das aguisic es 13 Se o ciclo de aquisic o tiver sido activado pelo bot o Inicia aquisic o presente na janela principal o estado do avanco do ciclo mostrado pelos quadradinhos azuis que surgem na barra o avanco dos quadradinhos azuis proporcional ao avanco do ciclo de aquisic o Quando o ciclo de aquisic o termina a barra fica completa de quadradinhos azuis e ocorre a actualizac o dos dados dispon veis A aquisic o continua ciclicamente enquanto n o for pressionado o bot o STOP Quando a comunicac o n o est activa a barra cinza e n o h quadradinhos azuis Caso o ciclo de aquisi o nao tenha sido activado pelo bot o Inicia aquisi o mas directamente a partir da central n o h quadradinhos azuis para indicar o estado de avanco do ciclo Quadro em que aparece a descric o codificada em ingl s das actividades de comunicac o 14 Dardo Plus PC LITE PT 9 Schneider
122. dification La finestra visualizzata nel caso si voglia inserire un nuovo utente 1 rimuovere 2 oppure modificare 3 la lista degli utenti gia abilitati all utilizzo di DARDO PLUS PC LITE Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider IT 25 Electric Inserimento Nuovo Utente User Permits E 1 User 01 8 Guest Generic Guest ES User 02 Administrator Manager New Permit E User name Password Contirm password Administrator Description ME Remove Modification uit Nella finestra Nuovo Permesso necessario inserire le informazioni che vanno a riempire le tre colonne della lista Permessi Utenti Nome utente 4 Livello cio se amministratore o utente generico 5 Descrizione fornita al momento della definizione dell utente 6 Una volta che l amministratore avr generato il proprio profilo con relativa password 7 e quello degli utenti generici per entrare nel Programma DARDO PLUS PC LITE ogni utilizzatore dovr impiegare tali informazioni Per eliminare o modificare un nominativo occorre prima selezionare con il mouse la chiave posta nella colonna 8 alla sinistra della riga corrispondente all utente Cambia Password Change Password E Old password pe _ Mew password Contirm neve pass word Questo menu un modo veloce per modificare la password del profilo con cui si entrati ll menu Cambia Password e attivo solamente se si e entrati nel programma utilizzando u
123. display non presentano situazioni di anomalia e Rosso nel caso in cui siano presenti condizioni di anomalia come errori di comunicazione stato d utility stato di rest anomalia emergenza Test inibiti corto circuito sulla linea di controllo lampade Giallo in caso contrario Test in corso 3 Rosso test in corso Verde nessun test Delta 4 e Rosso se lo sfasamento di data e ora tra il PC e la centralina ha superato il valore impostato nei parametri o Verde in caso contrario il parametro Delta indica se le date e l ora delle centraline non sono corrispondenti con le impostazioni del programma Comandi Sono disponibili i comandi o Acquisizione 1 avvia il ciclo di acquisizione della centralina o Imposta data e ora 2 data e ora del PC inviati alla centralina Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider IT 21 BP Electric Controls on control unit 2 Set date and time Proprieta Generali DARDO PLUS RM 1 General Status Test Mame Dardo Plus 1 5 Address Acquisition cycles LI DL Notes Es IT 22 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Selezionando nel punto 1 e possibile attribuire un nome alla centralina Selezionando nel punto 2 possibile alloperatore cambiare la frequenza di acquisizione della centralina supervisionata Il parametro cicli di acquisizione impostato inizialmente sul valore 1 Questo parametro indica la frequenza di acquisizione dati della centralin
124. display the Properties menu click on the menu to open the Light Properties window 1 Clicking on the Properties menu is equivalent to pressing the Properties button in the main window and described in the Command buttons paragraph In the Light Properties window select the General folder 2 Click the key 3 on the Family string and the Change Family window 4 appears in which you can choose or change the family or image to link to the light optional Click the key 5 and you can allocate a description to the light 011411 Plant Schneider General Technical Data Status Number mo Name Everiux R40 p Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Electric Language File Configuration Authorizations Maite Su Ki Modify parameters Language Warnings Use this menu to change the user language Select the Language option and a window is displayed containing the national flags of various countries Click the flag to set the required language Language Warnings File Configuration Authorizations Mie al por Modify parameters i Language Warnings Use this menu to access a window which can be used to insert a list of warnings which are displayed in the bar 1 in which the events errors signals with set frequencies are displayed This is important for lighting systems requiring cleaning and routine maintenance
125. dresu syst mu a jm na person lu dr by Po vlo en po adovan ch dat a jejich potvrzen tla tkem OK se syst m bude zobrazovat v hlavn m okn Zkontrolujte zda bylo zvoleno ok nko zprovoznit sb r dat CS 12 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric Syst my se budou zobrazovat jako podlouhl obdelnicky na jejich lev stran se bude zobrazovat n zev a tvere ek 7 kter bude m nit barvu podle stavu syst mu Barvy ur uj c stav jsou n sleduj c e Blikaj c ern ed pokud syst m je t nebyl nakonfigurov n a nebyl z n ho proveden sb r dat e Blikaj c ed erven pokud se na jednom z objekt n sleduj c rovn vyskytuj erven nebo lut signalizace e Zelen jestli e se na v ech objektech n sleduj c rovn vyskytuj pouze zelen signalizace File Configuration Authorizations Options Open System Remove System Properties Pri kliknut na objekt syst mu se obrys tvere ku zv razn mod e m se potvrd volba P i kliknut prav m tla tkem my i na zvolen objekt syst mu se otev e menu kter umo uje prov d t n sleduj c operace e Otev t syst m 8 rovn se stisknut ipky p ej t na n sleduj c rove co umo n zobrazit d c jednotky kter jsou k syst mu p ipojeny e Zru it syst m 9 tato volba se rovn stisknut tla tka Zru it popsan ho v odstavc
126. e Properties button in the main window and described in the Command buttons paragraph Properties System Properties System General Contacts Name Schneider E Installation 02 07 2008 9 25 265 Connection Serial port 1200 E7 2 COM 1 Acquire Acquisition Enabled Change connection General Contacts Internal Contacte External Contacts Description Es Change Contacts Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider EN 13 d Electric Inserting Control Units After inserting the system and defining the communication type and some features you can insert the control units You must instruct the program and put it in condition to see and identify the control units In the window which appears on the screen is the list of types of control units to select Choose those used to make up the system Insert control unit Control unit type gt DARDO PLUS Control unit name Dardo Plus 1 1 Address In the Control unit group level displayed by opening the system or pressing the NEXT arrow arrow on the right described in the Command buttons paragraph right click on the background and select Insert control unit A window opens and you can choose the type of unit to insert in the system 1 The types of units that can be selected are Dardo control units Having made the selection define the control unit address 2 then confirm the insertion b
127. e 8 Jak testy autonomie a funk n testy pl novan podle kalend e tak ru n spustiteln testy jsou zablokov ny Na vstupu p kazu bude p tomen sign l 24Vdc a d c jednotka bude po celou dobu po kterou tento sign l z stane aktivn vys lat lamp m p kaz testu z toho vypl v e trv n sign lu rozli uje funk n test od testu autonomie Na vstupu p kazu bude p tomen sign l 24Vdc a jakmile dojde ke zji t n p echodu mezi nep tomnost sign lu a p tomnost sign lu d c jednotka vy le lamp m p kaz RESTORE Na vstupu p kazu bude p tomen sign l 24Vdc a jakmile dojde ke zji t n p echodu mezi nep tomnost sign lu a p tomnost sign lu d c jednotka vy le lamp m p kaz Utility zablokov n pohotovosti Na komunika n lince lamp se vyskytl zkrat Na lamp ch p ipojen ch po jednom z test se vyskytla anom lie N kter nebo v echny nakonfigurovan lampy sd lily d c jednotce e na nich nen p tomna dob jec s Byla zji t na chyba na s riov komunikaci Stav aktivn ho sign lu existuje tehdy jestli e je zvoleno ok nko vedle n pisu Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric Povolen Program mohou pou vat jak spr vci tak obecn u ivatel ka d mu u ivateli odpov d jedno heslo Spr vce m e zasahovat do jak koliv funkce host m e zasahovat omezen m e spou t t a zastavovat sb
128. e Warnings Fran den har menyn kan du byta det anv nda spr ket V ljer du alternativet Spr k visas ett f nster med olika flaggor klickar du pa en av dem stalls programmet in pa motsvarande sprak Language Varningar File Configuration Authorizations Mie C Ee mj Modify parameters Language Warnings Genom denna meny kommer du in pa ett fonster dar du kan infoga en varninglista som visas pa skarmens meddelanderad 1 dar alla handelser feli signaleringar visas efter installd frekvens Detta kan komma till anvandning om man t ex ska planera in rengoring eller underhall av utrustningen t ex rengoring av armaturer Nar installd tid loper ut visas felet signaleringen pa namnda meddelanderad 1 ve System Level Login Default amp dministrator Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider SV 33 Electric Warnings Description Period Last Control 5 10 05 2007 12 02 45 Forvarv Efter att ha infogat bade anlaggningen och styrenheterna i programmet ar det inte nodvandigt att infoga alla lampor som r kopplade till styrenheterna N r konfigurationen r slutf rd racker det att man startar en forvarvcykel som visar symbolscheman for alla kopplade lampor och forbereder en lista Over kopplade och inte kopplade lampor F rutom vid best mda tidpunkter som programmerats i samband med konfiguraitonen kan forvarvproceduren ven startas manuellt N B Det finns ett villkor som kan satta
129. e Midas Authorizations Options Lamp information New communications port Remove communications pork Substitute modem Atrav s deste menu depois de ter executado uma aquisig o possivel visualizar o que foi detectado em relac o as l mpadas durante a conex o Information 09 gt 01 OD 1 Di nf dy py PR Save file Na janela poss vel ler as seguintes informa es As l mpadas que o sistema detectou durante a conex o 1 Os n meros das l mpadas dispon veis para a conex o 2 A op o de salvar num ficheiro de texto esses dados 3 PT 38 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric Eventos Registo eventos O programa regista todos os eventos usando uma base de dados de estrutura circular denominada FIFO first in first out ou seja o primeiro dado registado o primeiro eliminado guando termina o espaco dispon vel O n mero de eventos que se deseja conservar que definem o espaco dispon vel estabelecido pelo utilizador no menu Modifica Par metros Modify parameters Ao fechar o programa se o utilizador responde sim a pergunta presente na janela que aparece antes do fecho salvada uma copia na base de dados numa pasta cujo nome o n mero relativo ao dia da semana O ficheiro se chama dardoLite mdb poss vel executar a mesma operac o de salvamento da base de dados atrav s do bot o Backup database Os eventos registados s o ligad
130. e Test in progress Open Control Unit Remove Control Unit Properties PT 34 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Abre se uma janela na qual deve se seleccionar o item Aquisi o e inici la premendo o bot o Envia Enter 3 Controls on control unit 1 Acquisition Acquisition Inhibit test Disable inhibit Restore Functional tests Even lamps autonomy test Odd lamps autonomy test Rest Test duration in minutes 3 O Time of test 00 00 00 00 start day and month 01701 01 01 008 Entre os comandos escolher 4 o comando a enviar L mpadas Indicac es nos sin pticos das lampadas Para ver o estado das l mpadas associadas a uma determinada central necess rio seleccion la e ent o Iniciar a aguisic o dos dados usando o comando espec fico Ao terminar a aquisic o todas as l mpadas s o visualizadas com sin pticos dentro dos quais vis vel a numerac o com que foi registada e no caso de centrais o n mero de linha 1 ou 2 e o n mero de l mpadas da linha A cor depende do estado registado pela central ap s um Teste de Funcionamento ou de Autonomia O sin ptico pode mostrar outros detalhes Ao seleccionar com a tecla direita a func o propriedades mostrada uma janela com a descric o general as informac es t cnicas technical data e o estado da l mpada status com os eventuais problemas registados A l mpada seleccionada distingue se por ter o
131. e acquisition B e 6 A clock is displayed when the acquisition is executing an interrogation delay cycle e 7 A light and the group of lights are displayed when light status is being acquired e 8 A red circle is displayed when control unit status is being acquired 9 A hand pressing a key is displayed when DARDO PLUS PC LITE sends a command to the control unit Communication port C e RS485 direct serial communication icon icon summarising the serial connection cables 10 Active acquisition icon 12 the LED is green if acquisition is active and red if acquisition is OFF Box indicating the status of the acquisitions 13 If the acquisition cycle is activated by the Start acquisition button in the main window the progress of the cycle can be checked from the progress of the little blue squares making up the bar the progress of the small blue squares is proportional to the progress of the acquisition cycle When the acquisition cycle is complete the bar is full of little blue squares and the available data has been updated The acquisition continues in cycles until you press STOP When communication is not active the bar is grey and there are no little blue squares If the acquisition cycle is not started from the Start acquisition button but directly from the control unit there are no little blue squares to indicate the progress of the cycle Box showing the codified description in English o
132. e bouton 5 pour attribuer une description a la lampe 011411 Plant Schneider General Technical Data Status Number mo Name Everlux R4 D Es Family Change family Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Language langue File Configuration Authorizations Mie C gt mj Modify parameters Warnings Ce menu permet de changer la langue utilis e En s lectionnant l option Language langue il est possible de faire appara tre une fen tre contenant les drapeaux de diff rentes nations il suffit de cliquer avec la souris sur le drapeau souhait pour s lectionner la langue correspondante Language Warnings avertissements File Configuration Authorizations Mie Sal poe Modify parameters i Language warnings Ce menu permet d acc der a une fen tre ou il est possible d entrer une liste d avertissements lesquels s affichent dans la barre 1 ou sont visualis s les v nements erreurs signalisations selon la p riodicit configur e Cette fonction s av re importante pour les syst mes d clairage o il faut programmer le nettoyage d appareils ou l entretien programm nettoyage des appareils par exemple A chaque avertissement correspond la visualisation de l erreur ou de la signalisation sur la barre 1 e o System Level Login Default amp dministrator Dardo Plus PELTE Schneider FR 33 GH Electric FR 33
133. e cancelar os registos seleccionados Ao mover o mouse nos registos linhas de mensagem e manter premida a tecla CTRL poss vel amplair o n mero de campos seleccionados Para cancelar todos os registos sem ter que seleccion los individualmente suficiente premer antes o bot o Selecciona tudo Select all 8 O bot o Notas Notes 4 permite associar um coment rio a um ou mais campos Os registos s o seleccionados mantendo pressionada a tecla CTRL e clicando com o bot o esquerdo do mouse na borda esquerda da grade Os registos que t m uma nota associada mostram um asterisco sobre a descric o O bot o Reconhece Identify 7 elimina o cone vermelho presente no espaco 1 e o eventual sinal de bip indicando que o evento j foi reconhecido em outras palavras tira o sistema do estado de anomalia Percurso da central Control unit route 10 indica em que instalac o est conectada a central seleccionada na tabela O bot o Imprime Print 5 permite imprimir os dados seleccionados na grade Antes da janela de impressao propriamente dita mostrada a janela de escolha da impress o Para imprimir obrigat rio seleccionar uma impressora mas poss vel sair sem imprimir usando a tecla Fecha Close 9 Dardo Plus PC LITE PT 41 Schneider CA Printer settings List of fields Total pages Print fram page To page ma T 16 lill Lines printing per row of data gt 1 7 SER Last line printin
134. e peut tre annul e mise a un demi caract re ou a un caract re entier La partie inf rieure de la fen tre visualise les param trages du caractere d impression Le bouton Character caract re 21 permet de choisir le type le style et la dimension du caract re Si l on s lectionne un caract re avec le symbole de l imprimante l impression peut s av rer plus rapide en particulier pour les imprimantes a aiguilles Il est possible de rouvrir la fen tre pour s lectionner l imprimante Printer 22 Lancer impression Print 23 ou sortir de la fen tre d impression sans rien faire Quit 24 A ATTENTION D LES CARACTERES D IMPRESSION VISUALISES SONT CEUX DE L IMPRIMANTE SELECTIONNEE DANS LE PANNEAU DE CONFIGURATION FR 42 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric Le bouton Search recherche 6 permet de s lectionner un sous ensemble d v nements visualis s sur la grille des enregistrements 25 Log search System SER VERT First Floor Of d Event type Event Control unit e D I Commpx skor Error Leer Ere marco El l NM eT WW Mabe wa JL e 30 Typologie des v nements enregistr s La recherche peut englober plusieurs crit res combin s d une facon quelconque Par exemple si Ion s lectionne le nom d un systeme System 25 la liste des postes Control unit 26 pr sentera uniquement ceux qui appartiennent au systeme en question ainsi que
135. e uso do aparelho ATENC O A INOBSERVANCIA DAS INSTRU ES DE INSTALA O E USO DO APARELHO PROVOCA A PERDA DA GARANTIA PT 2 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Electric Conte do da embalagem Abrir a embalagem do produto e certificar se de que cont m todos os itens 1 CD DARDO PC LITE 2 Manual de instalac o Dardo Plus PC LITE Schn eid er PT 3 d Electric Informacoes Gerais Organizac o das instalac es A id ia b sica da aplicac o uma organizac o estrutural em varios niveis que representam A s insta o es A s central is e A s lampada s Os elementos de cada n vel podem ser renomeados para representar a realidade f sica da instala o Instala o Central I Gest o das instalac es O programa DARDO PLUS PC LITE capaz de dialogar com as Centrais da fam lia DARDO PLUS possibilitando monitorar um sistema de l mpadas em larga escala A aplicac o permite ao utilizador gerir controlar e programar o funcionamento de cada central Com DARDO PLUS PC LITE poss vel executar comandos interactivos oferecendo as mesmas fun es presentes nos pain is das Centrais Os resultados dos testes e as eventuais anomalias dos sistemas verificados s o registados pelo programa DARDO PLUS PC LITE permitindo ao operador realizar pesquisas e impress es dos eventos memorizados Para maiores detalhes sobre caracter sticas de cada central consultar o par grafo Tipos de centrais
136. e v ntetider Fr n listan f r val av radavst nd 20 kan du v lja avst ndet mellan tv datarader Detta avst nd kan upph vas s ttas p halv eller hel teckenstorlek L ngst ned p f nstret visas inst llningarna f r utskriftens teckensnitt Knappen Teckensnitt 21 l ter dig v lja teckensnitt stil och teckenstorlek Anv nder du ett tecken med skrivarsymbol kan utskriften ske snabbare s rskilt om du har n lskrivare Du kan Oppan f nstret igen f r att v lja skrivare 22 Skriva ut 23 eller st nga skrivarf nstret utan att g ra n got 24 4 VIKTIGT E e U TECKENSNITT SOM VISAS I F NSTRET GALLER DEN P KONTROLLPANELEN FORVALDA SKRIVAREN SV 42 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric KnappenSok 6 anv nds for att v lja en undegrupp med visade h ndelser p posttabellen 25 Log search System Control fini SER VERT First Floor IDP 01 da Event type Event Corral uni De Commpx skor Errar Liter Z i O E E Mabe wa JL e 30 Olika typer av registrerade handelser S kningen kan utf ras via olika kriteriekombinaitoner Om du t ex v ljer ett anl ggningsnamn 25 s ker programmet i styrenhetslistan 26 och hittar bara styrenheter som tillhor den angivna anlaggningen och den eventuella listan Over tillh rande lampor 27 Om listan ar avmarkerad betyder det att alla element ing r Det finns fyra olika typer av handelser 28 kommunikat
137. ecialmente modificar as caracter sticas dos objectos dos n veis e definir novos utilizadores Convidados E permitido ver todos os dados do programa iniciar e encerrar o ciclo de aquisi o Se os dados inseridos durante a instala o n o est o correctos na inicia o do programa aparece a janela para inserir novamente os c digos de activa o do software Dardo Plus PC LITE PT 5 Schneider Ex Cliente Customer cod 1 1SSS c d 2 3456 345678 Ce Lite O Map Customer hisss 1 O Janela Principal o bot o direito do mouse nos objectos File Configuration Authorizations Options Atrav s dos bot es de comando podem ser feitas rapidamente algumas opera es muitas das quais usam ystem Level EEI Login Default amp dministrator rd Da PT 6 Schneider amp Electric Dardo Plus PC LITE Os bot es t m os seguintes significados e Bot o Novo 1 Bot o Elimina 2 Bot o Propriedades 3 Bot o Inicia Aquisi o 4 Bot o P ra Aquisi o 5 e Bot o Sa da 6 permite inserir uma nova instala o ou central no monitor O tipo de objecto inserido depende do n vel em que se encontra permite cancelar o objecto seleccionado na tela permi
138. ectadas sem rede el ctrica est o em condi o de emerg ncia inibida O comando de Restore est activo A central est no estado de Utility inibi o da emerg ncia A linha de comunica o com as l mpadas est em curto circuito As l mpadas conectadas ap s um TESTE DE FUNCIONAMENTO ou TESTE de AUTONOMIA apresentaram uma anomalia Algumas ou todas as l mpadas configuradas comunicaram central a aus ncia de rede el ctrica para recarga Detectado um erro de comunica o serial A condi o de sinal activo existe quando o quadrado ao lado da escrita est seleccionado Schneider PT 19 BP Electric Teste Indica as datas programadas para os testes de funcionamento 1 e de autonomia 3 S o mostradas as datas dos testes de autonomia das l mpadas mpares As datas dos testes de autonomia das l mpadas pares podem ser determinadas acrescentando 1 dia as datas visualizadas PT 20 DARDO PLUS 1 Functional tests 0 201 2006 03 01 2006 04 01 2006 05 01 2006 06 01 2006 O01 2008 UO 2006 09 01 2006 10401 2006 11 01 2006 12 01 2006 13401 2006 14 01 2006 15 01 2006 Operating time test OFA 22007 3 00 00 14212007 3 00 00 2148202007 3 00 00 2011 2 2007 3 00 00 04 01 006 3 00 00 11 01 2006 6 00 00 16 01 2006 6 00 00 25 01 2006 5 00 00 01 102 2006 9 00 00 08 02 2006 9 00 00 15 02 2008 5 00 00 2202 2006 3 00 00 902 2006 9 00 00 071052006 6 00 00 Schneider Dardo Plu
139. ed it is equivalent to pressing the Remove button described in the Command buttons paragraph displays information on the selected control unit it is equivalent to pressing the Properties button in the main window and described in the Command buttons paragraph Types of control unit managed Dardo PLUS PC LITE can communicate with the following types of control unit o DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT used to control self contained lights Function and autonomy tests can be programmed on this control unit by configuring the date time and freguency Control unit enabled to monitor self contained lights send commands from the keyboard or supervisor and collect light status data from the supervisor Interactive commands can be transmitted on this control unit o The DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM used to control self contained lights Function and autonomy tests can be programmed on this control unit by configuring the date time and freguency Control unit enabled to monitor self contained lights send commands by means of 24 Vdc voltage network on specific inputs Interactive commands cannot be transmitted on this control unit Configuration of control unit addresses The control unit addresses are defined during installation of the system by means dependent on the control unit type rotary switch or initialisation The addresses configured in the control units must be reported inside DARDO PLUS PC LITE e DARDO PLUS CONTRO
140. edenza la barra 1 pu assumere anche un altra colorazione 01152 Plant Esempio di lampada configurata che non risponde IT 36 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider 01152 Plant x Esempio di Lampada controllata da DARDO PLUS fuori autonomia Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider IT 37 BP Electric Informazioni Lampade Dopo avere avviato un ciclo di acquisizione che consente di visualizzare sinottici delle lampade collegate nell apposito livello delle lampade si rende anche disponibile un elenco delle lampade collegate e delle lampade non collegate Al termine dell acquisizione possibile salvare le informazioni acquisite in un file di testo acia Authorizations Options Lamp information New communications port Remove communications pork Substitute modem Tramite questo menu dopo aver eseguito un acquisizione possibile visualizzare quanto rilevato relativamente alle lampade durante il collegamento Information 05 gt 01 e Control unit route Level OVA Dardo Plus 1 o A OM nad Save Tile Nella finestra e possibile leggere le seguenti informazioni Le lampade che il sistema ha rilevato durante il collegamento 1 e numeri delle lampade disponibili al collegamento 2 H L opzione di salvataggio su un file di testo di questi dati 3 IT 38 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Eventi Registrazione eventi II programma registra tutti gli eventi utilizzando
141. emendo il pulsante 1 Avvia acquisizione Con questo comando si esegue l acquisizione dei dati relativi agli oggetti di tutti gli impianti collegati al PC Il pulsante Avvia acquisizione descritto nel paragrafo Pulsanti di comando Se si vuole eseguire l acquisizione solamente dei dati degli oggetti collegati ad una centralina cliccare con il tasto destro del mouse sul sinottico di una centralina selezionata in tutte le modalit di controllo si apre un men in cui si deve selezionare la voce Comandi 2 DP 1 a Broken ao Commands ke Test in progress Open Control Unit Remove Control Unit Properties IT 34 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Si apre una finestra in cui si deve selezionare la voce Acquisizione e farla partire premendo il pulsante Invia 3 Controls on control unit 1 Acquisition Acquisition Inhibit test Disable inhibit Restore Functional tests Even lamps autonomy test Odd lamps autonomy test Rest Test duration in minutes 3 O Time of test 00 00 00 00 start day and month o 401 01 01 008 All interno dei comandi si sceglie 4 il comando da inviare Lampade Indicazione sui sinottici di lampada Per visualizzare lo stato delle lampade associate ad una determinata centralina necessario selezionarla e quindi avviare l acquisizione dei dati utilizzando l apposito comando Una volta terminata l acquisizio
142. ement a l aide du bouton Quitter d crit dans le paragraphe Boutons de commande Configuration Authorizations Options as Modes de fonctionnement Le programme DARDO PLUS PC LITE pr sente deux modes de fonctionnement selon que l acquisition est activ e ou non e Lorsque l acquisition est d sactiv e et que le programme est ouvert avec le profil d administrateur il est possible de modifier la configuration la structure etc e Vice versa lorsque l acquisition est activ e il est impossible de modifier la configuration Ports de communication Le systeme est compos de postes auxquels sont reli es des lampes il est n cessaire d duquer le programme pour qu il soit en mesure de voir le syst me ceci avant de d finir le systeme proprement dit Il faut d finir dans le programme quel port du PC parmi ceux qui sont encore libres sera associ au systeme ceci afin d attribuer a chaque systeme une connexion sp cifique qui ne puisse pas tre confondue avec les autres La connexion peut tre locale via une connexion s rie ou a distance connexion via Ethernet L utilisation d un cable RS232 comporte l utilisation d un convertisseur RS232 RS485 entre le PC et la s rie de postes L utilisation d un cable RJ45 et d un raccordement au r seau LAN implique utilisation d un CONVERTISSEUR Ethernet RS232 dans le systeme Le fonctionnement via CONVERTISSEUR Ethernet RS232 est possible uniquement si un PILOTE ad quat es
143. emove Cancel Remove Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 11 Electric Syst m Vlo en syst mu Po nadefinov n toho jak komunika n port pou ijete pro syst m a jak vlastnosti m tento port m t bude mo n vlo it syst m a nadefinovat jeho vlastnosti V okn na obrazovce se zobraz seznam komunika n ch port kde je mo n n jak zvolit Seznam obsahuje i port kter byl ji zvolen v okam iku definov n nov ho komunika n ho portu a ten pr v mus te zvolit Input window E Insert system Name Neweblame Choose a Port W Enable acquisition Description A Internal Contacte External Contacts Um st te kurzor na rove Syst m a prav m tla tkem my i klikn te na pozad Dojde ke zvolen Vlo it syst m a pot se otev e okno v n m je t eba nastavit komunika n port a v echny informace nutn k tomu aby byl port nastaven jednozna n o Vlo te n zev syst mu do ok nka nazvan ho N zev e Zvolte jeden komunika n port mezi t mi kter je t nejsou pou ity a jejich seznam se zobrazuje v dialogov m okn Zvolit port e Zvolte funkci Zprovoznit sb r dat kter povoluje prov d n sb ru dat ze syst mu Vlo te popis syst mu do textov ho ok nka Popis voliteln e Vlo te vnit n a vn j referenty do p slu n ch textov ch ok nek voliteln Do pol ek Popis a Referenti je mo n vlo it nap klad a
144. en lamp 9 Popis ud losti 10 U ivatel kter zaznamenal ud lost 11 CS 40 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE amp Electric Tla tka okna Log ud lost a vyhled v n Pomoc tla tek ve spodn sti okna je mo n dit v echny ud losti zaznamenan v datab zi a zobrazovan v tomto okn Event log x Date System HJ Cont di Lan Lam DP Name Description User 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERVER First M oo Lamprequired 0 Default amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 26 SERVER Fist M Z Lamprequired Defaults diministratnr _ 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERVER Fist Of Lamprequired O _ Default amp dministrator 31708 2007 9 03 26 SERVERI Fist mM Z L mprequired Diefault dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 26 SERVER Fist M A Lamprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist M sni DefaulkAdministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist M D true Default amp dministrator 312082007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist TI DM oo BR ned Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist M o J Di Lamprequired Default dministratar 31 06 2007 9 03 24 SERVERI First M B Lamprequired O _ Defaul amp dministrator 3108 2007 9 03 23 SERVER Fist M D Lamprequired Default dministratar 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERWER First MJ o o D Lampreqguired O Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03
145. en tre contenant la description les informations techniques et l tat de la lampe ainsi que les problemes ventuellement enregistr s La lampe s lectionn e se distingue par un encadr 1 plus pais que les autres o E Signalisations du synoptique valables pour tous les postes La barre de couleur 2 situ e en bas du tableau synoptique indique l tat de la lampe et peut changer de couleur o Couleur Noir Grise clignotante quand la lampe est configur e mais ne figure pas dans la configuration du poste e Couleur grise lorsque la lampe est pr sente dans la configuration mais ne r pond pas e Couleur rouge lorsque la lampe est d fectueuse Couleur jaune lorsque la lampe est hors des limites d autonomie Couleur verte dans les autres cas c est dire quand tout va bien Dardo Plus PC LITE FR 35 Schneider Exemple de lampe OK a la suite d un test de fonctionnement 01411 Plant Schneider General Technical Data Status Lampes contr l es par DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT Outre les indications d j fournies pr c demment la barre 1 peut afficher aussi une autre couleur 01152 Plant Exemple de lampe configur e ne r pondant pas FR 36 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Exemple de lampe contr l e par DARDO PLUS hors des limites d autonomie 01152 Plant Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider FR 37 BP Electric Informations lampes Apres avoir lance un cycle d acquisitio
146. en varje gang man kor en forvarvcykel V rdet 2 anger att man forvarvar data fran styrenheten varannan gang man kor en forvarvcykel Vardet O anger att data aldrig forvarvas fran styrenheten Om du markerar l get 3 ppnas ett f lt for operat rens beskrivningar och anm rkningar Om du markerar l get 4 kan operat ren byta adressen f r den vervakade styrenheten Status Dardo Plus PC LITE DARDO PLUS RM 1 E General Status Test M Inhibition Test Restore Utility Short eye Faut Emergency Communication Electric Schneider SV 23 SV 24 Blockering 1 Test 2 Restore 3 Utility 4 Kortslutning Dardo eye linjen 5 Oregelbundenhet 6 Nodlage 7 Kommunikation 8 B de manuella och schemalagda brinntids och funktionstester ar blockerade Vid kommandots ing ng finns en 24Vdc signal under tiden som denna signal f rblir aktiv skickar styrenheten testkommandot till lamporna detta inneb r att det r varaktigheten som skiljer funktionstesten fr n brinntidstesten Vid kommandots ing ng finns en 24Vdc signal n r verg ngen mellan signalens fr nvaro och signalens n rvaro avk nns skickar styrenheten kommandot RESTORE till lamporna Vid kommandots ing ng finns en 24Vdc so
147. en knapp nar DARDO PLUS PC LITE sander ett kommando till styrenheten Kommunikationsport C e Ikonen for direkt seriell Kommunikation med RS485 ikon som sammanfattar den seriella anslutningens kablar 10 Ikonen forvarv aktivt 12 lydioden lyser gront om forvarvet ar aktivt rott om forvarvet r avstangt Ruta som anger forvarvstatuset 13 Om forvarvcykeln aktiveras med knappen Starta f rv rv p huvudfonstret kan du verifiera hur cykeln framskrider med hj lp av sm bl a fyrkanter som utgf rr forvarvindikator antalet bl a fyrkanter ar direkt proportionell mot forvarvcykelns framskridande Nar forvarvcykeln r slutf rd ar indikatorlinjen full med bl a fyrkanter och tillg ngliga data har uppdaterats Forvarvet upprepas cykliskt tills man trycker p knappen STOPP Om kommunikationen inte r aktiv r linjen gra och utan bl a fyrkanter Om forvarvcykeln inte aktiveras med knappen Starta forvarv utan direkt fr n styrenheten finns det inga bl a fyrkanter som indikerar hur cykeln framskrider Ruta som inneh ller en kodad beskrivning av kommunikationsaktiviteterna p engelska 14 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider SV 9 Electric Avsluta programmet Menyn Arkiv inneh ller undermenyn Avsluta som anv nds f r att l mna programmet DARDO PLUS PC LITE Eventuellt kan man ocks anv nda knappen Avsluta som beskrivs i avsnittet Kommandoknappar Configuration Authorizations Options EM
148. ent hype Event Corral uni De Commpx skor Errar Liter be ne Z i O E E Mabe wa JL e 30 Druhy zaznamenan ch ud lost Vyhled v n je mno inou n kolika prokombinovan ch krit ri Nap klad p i zvolen n zvu n jak ho syst mu 25 budou ze seznamu d c ch jednotek 26 vyhled ny pouze ty kter pat k tomuto syst mu a p padn seznam k n mu p ipojen ch lamp 27 Nezvolen seznam znamen Ze jsou v n m obsa eny v echny prvky Existuj ty i druhy ud lost 28 chyby v komunikaci chyby ve fungov n programu jevy spojen s d c mi jednotkami jevy spojen s lampami Ud losti spjat s d c mi jednotkami a s lampami p edstavuj z znamy zm n stavu jejich p slu n ch vlastnost 29 Seznam chyb umo uje 30 zvolit pouze ud losti chybov nebo pouze ud losti informativn Seznam u ivatele umo uje zvolit pouze ud losti spojen s ur it m u ivatelem 31 Od do umo uje zvolit z znamy t kaj c se ur it ho obdob 32 Zpr va umo n zvolit z znamy kter maj stejn popis 33 Pozn mky umo n zvolit z znamy k nim je p i azena pozn mka 34 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 43 Electric Innehallsforteckning IO 6 Ty La Le TE 1 BrukS nNVISNING saun od oa nd O O nee 1 Vem v nder sig handboken till ENN renen rn rn rr KAKA KRK rr 1 PIAMGDOKECMS VIKT arenaria irta padane 1 s m o SN 1 ci EE d
149. ente la centralina invia il comando di RESTORE alle lampade All ingresso di comando ho la presenza di un segnale 24Vdc e rilevata la transizione tra segnale assente e segnale presente la centralina invia il comando di Utility inibizione dell emergenza La linea di comunicazione con le lampade e in corto circuito Le lampade collegate a seguito di un Test hanno riportato un anomalia Alcune o tutte le lampade configurate hanno comunicato alla centralina l assenza della rete di ricarica Rilevato un errore di comunicazione seriale La condizione di segnale attivo quando la casella a fianco della scritta selezionata Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Permessi Gli utenti che utilizzano il programma possono essere amministratori o utenti generici ad ognuno di loro corrisponde una password L amministratore pu intervenire su qualsiasi funzione l ospite ha un numero limitato di possibilit di intervento pu avviare l acquisizione dei dati od arrestarla visualizzare le note gi inserite e riconoscere gli eventi File Configuration MTE Options List of authorizations Change password Tramite questo menu possibile effettuare tutte le operazioni di gestione degli utenti abilitati al programma Il menu Permessi contiene due sottomenu e Lista Permessi 1 Cambia password 2 Lista Permessi User Permits E _ 8 l Generic Guest Administrator Manager Remove Mo
150. eptera kommandot ar funktionstest Kopplade jamna lampor som skulle kunna acceptera kommandot ar brinntidstest DARDO PLUS 1 Eg General Status Test 1 Inhibition Functional tests Ewen autonomy test Odd autonomy test Rest mode Restore Utility Short eye Fault Emergency Communication e Brinntidstest udda lampori 4 e Rest mode 5 Restore 6 Utility 7 e Kortslutning i Dardo eye linjen 8 e Oregelbundenhet 9 Nodlage 10 e Kommunikation 11 Dardo Plus PC LITE Kopplade udda lampor som skulle kunna acceptera kommandot ar brinntidstest Kopplade lampor som saknar natstrom ar i statuset blockering av nodlage Kommandot Restore ar aktivt Styrenheten ar i Utility lage blockering av nodl ge Kommunikationslinje med lamporna ar kortsluten Kopplade lampor signalerar en oregelbudenhet efter en FUNKTIONS eller BRINNTIDSTEST Nagra lampor har meddelat styrenheten att uppladdningsstrom saknas Fel upptacktes i den seriella kommunikationen Signalen ar aktiv om rutan bredvid texten ar bockad Electric SV 19 Schneider Test Anger datumet f r programmerade funktionstester 1 och brinntidstester 3 Datum for brinntidstest udda lampor visas Datum for brinntidstest jamna lampor kan best mmas genom att lagga till 1 dag i de angivna datumen SV 20 DARDO PLUS 1 0 201 2006 03 01 2006 049 01 2006 05 01
151. ergenza 10 e Comunicazione 11 Dardo Plus PC LITE General status Test Inhibition Functional tests Even autonomy test Odd autonomy test Rest mode Restore Utility Faut Emergency Communication Le lampade dispari collegate che si trovano nelle condizione di poter accettare il comando sono in TEST di autonomia Le lampade collegate in assenza rete sono in condizione di emergenza inibita Il comando di Restore e attivo La centralina nello stato di Utility inibizione dell emergenza La linea di comunicazione con le lampade e in corto circuito Le lampade collegate a seguito di un TEST FUNZIONALE o TEST di AUTONOMIA hanno riportato un anomalia Alcune o tutte le lampade configurate hanno comunicato alla centralina l assenza della rete di ricarica Rilevato un errore di comunicazione seriale La condizione di segnale attivo quando la casella a fianco della scritta selezionata Schneider IT 19 d Electric Test Riporta le date programmate dei test funzionali 1 e di autonomia 3 Sono visualizzate le date dei test di autonomia lampade dispari Le date dei test di autonomia lampade pari sono determinabili aggiungendo 1 giorno alle date visualizzate IT 20 DARDO PLUS 1 Functional tests 0201 2006 0301 2006 04 01 2006 05 01 2006 06 01 2006 O01 2008 UO 2006 09 01 2006 10401 2006 11 01 2006 12 01 2006 1340
152. eric Guest ES User 02 Administrator Manager New Permit E User name Password Contirm password Administrator Description ME Remove Modification uit Na janela Nova Permiss o New Permit necess rio inserir as informa es que preencher o as tr s colunas da lista Permiss es Utilizadores User permits Nome do utilizador User name 4 e Nivel ou seja se administrador ou utilizador gen rico 5 Descric o fornecida ao definir o utilizador 6 Como o administrador gerou o pr prio perfil com a respectiva senha 7 e o dos utilizadores gen ricos para entrar no Programa DARDO PLUS PC LITE todos os utilizadores devem usar essas informa es Para eliminar ou modificar um nome preciso antes seleccionar com o mouse a chave presente na coluna 8 esquerda correspondente ao utilizador Muda Senha Change Password Old password peri New pas word Contirm new password Este menu um modo r pido para modificar a senha do perfil com o qual se entrou O menu Muda Senha activo somente se se entrou no programa a usar um perfil inserido na Lista Permiss es Para modificar a senha preciso digitar a antiga senha old password a nova new password e confirm la confirm new password PT 26 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider amp Electric Opcoes Para permitir que o programa faca as verificac es das instalac es do modo mais id neo poss vel m
153. erimento premendo il pulsante OK Sullo sfondo compare il sinottico 3 corrispondente alla centralina selezionata DP 1 D SoBroken CH States 3 Test in progress DO Delta Per maggiori dettagli sulle caratteristiche delle singole centraline fare riferimento al paragrafo Tipi di centraline gestite Le centraline vengono visualizzate con un quadrato avente nella parte alta la sigla che identifica la centralina ed una serie di led che assumono un colore diverso secondo lo stato della centralina Quando viene avviata l acquisizione si ha l aggiornamento dello stato dei led presenti nel sinottico colori che possono assumere i led e che ne identificano lo stato sono Grigio Rosso Giallo e Verde Consultare il fascicolo specifico della singola centralina per il significato dei colori Cliccando sul sinottico di una centralina l avvenuta selezione evidenziata dal contorno del quadrato che diventa di colore blu IT 14 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider DF 1 Broken ES States amp Test in progress Delta Commands Open Control Unit Remove Control Unit Properties Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse sul sinottico di una centralina selezionata in tutte le modalita di controllo si apre un menu che consente di effettuare le seguenti operazioni e Comandi 3 apre il menu dei comandi possibili e Apri centralina 4 equivale a premere la freccia passa al livello
154. erso secondo lo stato dell impianto colori che identificano lo stato sono e Lampeggiante Nero Grigio quando l impianto non stato ancora configurato e acquisito e Lampeggiante Grigio Rosso se uno degli oggetti al livello successivo ha una delle segnalazioni rosse o gialle e Verde se tutti gli oggetti al livello successivo hanno solo segnalazioni verdi Configuration Authorizations Options File Ai u Schneider Open System Remove System Properties Cliccando su un oggetto impianto l avvenuta selezione evidenziata dal contorno del quadrato che diventa di colore blu Cliccando con il tasto destro del mouse su un oggetto impianto selezionato si apre un men che consente di effettuare le seguenti operazioni e Apri impianto 8 equivale a premere la freccia passa al livello successivo per visualizzare le centraline ad esso applicate e Elimina impianto 9 selezionato equivale a premere il pulsante Elimina descritto nel paragrafo Pulsanti di comando e Propriet 10 visualizza le informazioni sull impianto selezionato si apre la finestra che visualizza le impostazioni e tutte le descrizioni che sono state imposte al sistema ed equivale a premere il pulsante Propriet presente sulla finestra principale e descritto nel paragrafo Pulsanti di comando Properties System Ed Properties System
155. et d crit dans le paragraphe Boutons de commande Types de postes geres Le programme DARDO PLUS PC LITE est en mesure de dialoguer avec les types de postes suivants o DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT poste utilis pour lampes auto aliment es ou il est possible de programmer les tests de fonctionnement et d autonomie en configurant leur date leur heure et leur p riodicit Poste concu pour la surveillance de lampes auto aliment es avec envoi de commandes depuis le clavier ou le contr leur pr levement des donn es d tat de la lampe depuis le contr leur Sur ce poste il est possible de lancer des commandes interactives DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM poste utilis pour lampes auto aliment es o il est possible de programmer les tests de fonctionnement et d autonomie en configurant leur date leur heure et leur p riodicit Poste concu pour la surveillance de lampes auto aliment es avec envoi de commandes via la pr sence de tension 24 Vdc sur des entr es d termin es Sur ce poste il est impossible de lancer des commandes interactives Configuration des adresses des postes Les adresses des postes sont d finies pendant l installation du syst me selon des modalit s qui d pendent du type de poste commutateur rotatif ou initialisation Il est n cessaire d entrer les adresses configur es pour les postes dans DARDO PLUS PC LITE e Postes DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT lampes auto aliment es ces types de postes sont adressable
156. eters TimeOut Duration Level Names Log Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta settings Iw Tooltip images Server cance JL OK Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Electric SV 31 DP 4 Exempel p mark rens positionering Broken n ra DARDO PLUS ikonen DO States E Test in progress H Exempel p mark rens T positionering n ra ll lla e ele i AE ikonen f r vald lampa m rk att den bl a ramen har bliivit tjockare For att assocoiera en bild till lampan g r du s har 1 positionera mark ren p lampsymbolen 2 klicka p den for att aktivera menyn Egenskaper 3 klicka p menyn for att ppna f nstret Egenskaper Lampa 1 Att klicka p menyn Egenskaper ar det samma som att trycka p knappen Egenskaper p huvudfonstret som beskrivs i avsnittet Kommandoknappar 4 Fran f nstret Egenskaper Lampa v lj mappen Allm nt 2 5 Klicka med knappen 3 p str ngan Familj s visas f nstret Byt familj 4 d r du kan v lja eller andra b de familjen och bilden som ska associeras till lampan tillval 6 Klickar du med knappen 5 kan du aven mata in en beskrivning for lampan 011411 Plant Schneider General Technical Data Status Number mo Name Everlux R4 D Change family SV 32 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Spr k File Configuration Authorizations Maite C Lar Modify parameters Languag
157. ety of the unit as well as the physical safety of the operator The following is a list of the main symbols General notes E NOTE OR GENERAL INSTRUCTION Hazard signs indicating danger for the person and or the unit triangular shape N GENERIC HAZARD FOR PERSONS AND OR EQUIPMENT Warnings Y For technical information regarding the installation product use or malfunction please refer to SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC v Correct functioning of the product requires the use of SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC emergency equipment only v The product must be disposed off in accordance with the current environmental protection regulations in the country in which the unit is used CAUTION FAILURE TO OBSERVE THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE INSTALLATION AND USE OF THE UNIT WILL VOID THE GUARANTEE EN 2 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Electric Package contents Open the packaging and check to see if all of the following items are present 1 CD DARDO PC LITE 2 Installation Manual EN 3 Electric Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider d General information Organisation of systems The idea behind the application is a structural organisation at various levels which represent The system s e The control unit s e The light s The elements of each level can be renamed to represent the physical system System Control unit Lights miei System management The DARDO PLUS PC LITE program can dialogue with the DARDO PLUS co
158. f the communication activities 14 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider EN 9 Electric Exit from program The File menu includes the Exit submenu used to exit the DARDO PLUS PC LITE program You can also exit using the Exit button described in the Command buttons paragraph Configuration Authorizations Options EM Operating mode The DARDO PLUS PC LITE program has two operating modes depending on whether acquisition is enabled or not e If acquisition is not enabled and the program has been opened by the administrator then the configuration structure etc can be modified e Vice versa if acquisition is enabled then the configuration cannot be modified Communication ports The system is made up of control units to which lights are connected The program must be instructed and put in condition to see the system before defining the system itself In the program define which PC port will be connected to the system amongst those still free so that each system has a specific connection which cannot be exchanged with others The connection may be local using a serial connection or remote using an Ethernet connection If an RS232 cable is used there will also be an RS232 RS485 converter between the PC and the series of control units If an RJ45 cable is used and a connection to the LAN network there will be an Ethernet RS232 CONVERTER in the system Operation through the Ethernet RS232 CONVERTER is enabled if the appropri
159. for example cleaning When it is time for the warning the error signal will be displayed on the bar 1 ve System Level Login Default amp dministrator Dardo Plus PC LITE EN 33 Schneider Warnings Description Period Last Control 5 10 05 2007 12 02 45 Acquisition After inserting the system and control units making it up in the program you do not need to insert the lights connected to the control units When you have finished configuration just start an acquisition cycle This displays the synoptic panels of the lights connected and displays a list of the connected and non connected lights Acquisition can be started manually or automatically at the times set during configuration N B There is a condition which can automatically start the acquisition cycle independent of the operator s wishes when starting up the program if you do not enter the password within the time allowed for entering it you enter the program as a guest but at the same time the acquisition cycle starts The acquisition cycle can be started manually by pressing the Start acquisition button 1 This command executes the acquisition of the data on the objects of all the systems connected to the PC The Start acquisition button is described in the Command buttons paragraph EN RO If you want to execute the acquisition only of data regarding objects connected to one control unit right click on the synoptic
160. geridas PT 4 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Uso do Software Primeira Inicia o No menu de inicia o do sistema operacional seleccionar o menu Programas dentro dele seleccionar o grupo de programas SCHNEIDER e ent o abrir a pasta Dardo Plus PC Lite a n o ser que na fase de instala o tiver sido mudado o percurso e ou o nome e iniciar o programa DARDO PLUS PC LITE No in cio O programa mostra a janela Dardo PC Lite XXX Enter User Hame and Password User name password se E Para acessar o programa preciso digitar um nome de utilizador user name e uma senha password Dados de partida do programa seleccionar Nome Utilizador 1 gt Admin Senha 2 gt Admin ATENC O ud ACONSELHA SE MODIFICAR A SENHA NO PRIMEIRO ACESSO AO SISTEMA A definic o inicial descrita permite o acesso como administrador com as autorizac es necess rias para toda a gest o do programa Se n o for seleccionado nada o programa inicia automaticamente ap s alguns segundos com o perfil de utilizador gen rico O tempo de espera 3 antes de inicair o programa de modo autom tico pode ser alterado usando as op es de configura o As caracter sticas dos dois n veis s o Administradores poss vel ver todos os dados do programa com habilita o para defini es comandos e permitido iniciar e encerrar um ciclo de aquisi o O perfil administador pode fazer todas as opera es esp
161. god och referera till avsnittet Hanterbara styrenheter Styrenheterna visas med en fyrkant som p verdelen anger den identifierande beteckningen plus en rad lysdioder som byter f rg alltefter styrenhetens status N r f rv rv startas uppdateras lysdiodernas status i symbolschemat F rgerna som identifierar lysdioderna och anger olika status r Gr tt R tt Gult och Gr nt Referera till den enskilda styrenhetens handbok f r mer information om f rgernas betydelse Klickar du p en styrenhets symbolschema k nnetecknas valet av att fyrkantens ram v xlar till bl tt SV 14 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric DF 1 Broken ES States Test in progress Delta Commands Open Control Unit Remove Control Unik Properties Hogerklicka pa symbolschemat for vald styrenhet i alla kontrollagen sa Oppnas en meny som medger foljande tgarder e Kommandon 3 Oppnar en meny med tillgangliga kommandon e Oppna styrenhet 4 samma som pilknappen g till n sta niv for att visa tillh rande lampor armaturer e Ta bort styrenhet 5 samma som knappen Ta bort som beskrivs i avsnittet Kommandok nappar e Egenskaper 6 visar information om vald styrenhet motsvarar allts knappen Egenskaper p huvudf nstret som beskrivs i avsnittet Kommandoknappar Hanterbara styrenheter Programmet DARDO PLUS PC LITE kan samtala med f
162. habilitado se for instalado no PC o DRIVER oportuno ver Manual CONVERSOR Ethernet RS232 Authorizations Options Su Lar Lamp information New communications port Remove communications pork O menu de configura o Configuration apresenta tr s submenus que permitem inserir eliminar e ou modificar o tipo de comunica o presente entre o PC e a instala o e Nova porta de comunica o New communications port 1 e Elimina porta de comunica o Remove communications port 2 PT 10 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Inserc o nova porta de comunicac o 1 Mew communications port E Choose communications Port 1200 E 72 Usando este menu poss vel inserir na configura o do progrma uma nova porta de comunica o entre as presentes no PC O programa apresenta uma lista de portas seriais de COM1 a COM256 1 com o mouse poss vel seleccionar uma em baixo s o visualizados os par metros de comunica o usados que s o fixos Vale lembrar que o programa DARDO PLUS PC LITE possui somente portas seriais para as instala es configuradas no programa e n o todas aquelas presentes no Windows 1 ATEN O D A NOVA PORTA SERIAL DEVER SER INSERIDA DURANTE A INSTALACAO DE DARDO PLUS PC LITE NO SEU PC DE SUPERVISAO ATEN O D A CONEXAO POR CONVERSOR RS232 ETHERNET POSS VEL SE FOI INSTALADO ANTES O DRIVER DE COMUNICA O VER MANUAL CONVERSOR RS232 ETHERNET
163. het m ste denna v ljas och dataforvarv startas med avsedda kommando Efter f rv rvet visas alla lampor med symbolscheman som inneh ller numreringen som lampan registrerats med och nar det galler styrenheter linjenummer 1 eller 2 samt antalet lampor i linjen Fargen indikerar styrenhetens registrerade status efter en funktions eller brinntidstest Symbolschemat kan visa ytterligare detaljer Om du v ljer med hoger knapp funktionen Egenskaper ppnas ett fonster som inneh ller lampans beskrivning tekniska data och status med eventuella registrerade problem Vald lampa karakteriseras av en tjockare ram 1 et Signaleringar i symbolschemat som galler alla styrenheter Den gr na linjen 2 langst ned i symbolschemat anger lampans status och kan ha olika farger Blinkande Svart Gr tt n r lampan r konfigurerad men finns inte i styrenhetens konfiguration e Gr tt n r lampan finns med i konfigurationen men svarar inte R tt om lampan r trasig o Gult om lampans brinntid ar slut Gr nt i alla andra situationer dvs n r allt r OK Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider SV 35 Electric Exempel p lampa OK efter funktionstest 01111 Plant Schneider General Technical Data Status Lampor kontrollerade av DARDO PLUS STYRENHET F rutom ovan beskrivna f rger kan linjen 1 ven anv nda andra f rger 01152 Plant Exempel p konfigurerad lampa som inte svarar SV 36 Schneider Dardo
164. i Ovl dac tla tka e Vlastnosti 10 zobrazuje informace o zvolen m syst mu otev e se okno v n m se budou zobrazovat nastaven a v echny popisy kter byly syst mu zad ny a rovn se stisknut tla tka Vlastnosti v hlavn m okn popsan m v odstavci Ovl dac tla tka Properties System EI Properties System General Contacts General Contacts Internal Contacte Name Schneider E Installation 02 07 2008 9 25 26 Connection serial port 1200 E 7 2 COM 1 Acquire Acquisition Enabled Change connection Description EI External Contacts Change Contacts Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 13 d Electric Vlo en d c ch jednotek Po vlo en syst mu a nadefinov n druhu komunikace a dal ch vlastnost je mo n vlo it d c jednotky Programu je t eba podat takov informace aby byl schopen rozpoznat a ur it jednotliv d c jednotky V okn kter se otev e se zobraz seznam druh d c ch jednotek kter je mo n zvolit a pou t pro slo en syst mu Insert control unit Control unit type DARDO PLUS Control unit name Dardo Plus 1 1 Address Um st te kurzor na rove Skupina d c ch jednotek kter se bude zobrazovat p i otev en syst mu nebo p i stisknut ipky vp ed prav ipka popsan v odstavci Ovl dac tla tka Kliknut m
165. i sont en mesure d intervenir en toute s curit sur des syst mes mat riels et logiciels Le logiciel DARDO PLUS PC LITE a t congu et d velopp par SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC pour augmenter et rendre plus flexible le contr le des postes de la famille DARDO PLUS Une telle application permet a l utilisateur de g rer contr ler et programmer le fonctionnement des dispositifs indiqu s Le programme fournit une repr sentation hi rarchique du positionnement des lampes et des postes permettant d identifier rapidement le point d faillant L utilisateur peut g rer contr ler et programmer le fonctionnement des diff rents postes DARDO PLUS L application permet de voir l tat de chaque syst me et de toutes les lampes g r es L application visualise et m morise dans un fichier historique les alarmes et les d faillances relev es par le syst me DARDO PLUS PC LITE donne la possibilit de programmer la p riodicit des tests de fonctionnement et d autonomie des postes il permet aussi de lancer des commandes interactives qui offrent les m mes fonctions que celles des panneaux des postes Les r sultats des tests et les ventuelles d faillances des syst mes contr l s sont enregistr s par le programme DARDO PLUS PC LITE l op rateur peut ainsi rechercher et imprimer les v nements saisis L application permet de voir l tat de chaque syst me et de toutes les lampes g r es L application visualise et m morise dans un fichier histo
166. icates that data acquisition from the control unit is performed every two acquisition cycles Value O indicates that data acquisition from the control unit is never performed Select from point 3 to have an arbitrary descriptive note for the operator Select from point 4 to allow the operator to change the address of the control unit under supervision EN 18 Schneider BP Electric Dardo Plus PC LITE Status e Disabled 1 Manual and programmed function and autonomy tests are disabled e Function Test 2 The lights connected in a condition to accept the command are in Function Test mode e Even numbered Autonomy Test 3 The even numbered lights connected in a condition to accept the command are in Autonomy Test mode DARDO PLUS 1 Eg General status Test 7 Inhibition Functional tests Even autonomy test Odd autonomy test Rest mode Restore Utility Short eye Faut Emergency Communication Odd numbered Autonomy Test 4 The odd numbered lights connected in a condition to accept the command are in Autonomy Test mode Rest mode 5 The lights connected have no mains power supply and are in emergency disabled mode e Restore 6 The Restore command is active e Utility 7 The control unit is in utility mode emergency disabled e Dardo eye line short circuit 8 There is a short circuit on the light communication line e Fault 9 The lights connected fo
167. ify parameters Language Warnings Z tohoto menu vstoup te do okna v n m je mo n vkl dat seznam upozorn n kter se budou zobrazovat na li t 1 zobrazuj c r zn ud losti chyby signalizace podle nastaven ho pl nu Tato funkce je d le it pro osv tlovac syst my pro n je t eba pl novat i t n nebo dr bu p stroj nap klad i t n p stroj Po vypr en lh ty pro upozorn n se na li t zobraz chyba signalizace 1 e o System Level Login Default amp dministrator Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 33 Electric Warnings Description Period Last Control 5 10 05 2007 12 02 45 Sb r dat Po vlo en syst mu a d c ch jednotek z nich se tento syst m skl d do programu nebude t eba vkl dat lampy p ipojen k d c m jednotk m Po nakonfigurov n bude sta it spustit cyklus sb ru dat kter umo n zobrazit synoptick panely p ipojen ch lamp a vytvo it seznam p ipojen ch a nep ipojen ch lamp Sb r dat m e b t spu t n automaticky podle dat stanoven ch ve f zi konfigurace nebo ru n Pozn V n sleduj c situaci se cyklus sb ru dat spust automaticky nez visle na v li oper tora pokud p i spu t n programu nevlo te heslo a nech te ub hnout dobu stanovenou pro jeho vlo en program se otev e pod profilem host a z rove se spust cyklus sb ru dat Cyklus sb ru dat m e b
168. il mouse possibile selezionarne una in basso sono visualizzati i parametri di comunicazione utilizzati che sono fissi E bene ricordare che il programma DARDO PLUS PC LITE dispone per gli impianti solo delle porte seriali configurate all interno del programma e non di tutte quelle presenti in Windows 4 ATTENZIONE D LA NUOVA PORTA SERIALE DOVRA ESSERE INSERITA NEL CORSO DELL INSTALLAZIONE DI DARDO PLUS PC LITE SUL PC DI SUPERVISIONE A ATTENZIONE D IL COLLEGAMENTO MEDIANTE CONVERTITORE RS232 ETHERNET E POSSIBILE SE E STATO PRECEDENTEMENTE INSTALLATO IL DRIVER DI COMUNICAZIONE VEDI MANUALE CONVERTITORE RS232 ETHERNET Eliminazione Porta di comunicazione Con questo comando possibile eliminare qualora non sia stato collegato alcun impianto una delle porte di comunicazione definite nel programma DARDO PLUS PC LITE Remove communications port EN Choose Com Port to Remove Cancel Remove Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider d Electric Impianto Inserimento Impianto Dopo avere definito quale porta di comunicazione utilizzare per l impianto e le caratteristiche che essa deve avere possibile inserire l impianto e cominciare a definirne le caratteristiche Nella finestra a video presente l elenco delle porte di comunicazione in cui scegliere quella da utilizzare nell elenco presente anche la porta selezionata in precedenza al momento della definizione della nuova porta di comunicazione ed quell
169. ilka man kan infoga radera och eller ndra den typ av kommunikation som finns mellan datorn och anlaggningen e Ny kommunikaitonsport 1 e Ta bort kommunikationsport 2 SV 10 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Infoga Ny kommunikationsport New communications port E Choose communications Port 1200 E 72 Med den h r menyn kan du infoga i programmets konfiguration en ny kommunikationsport bland de som finns p datorn Programmet visar en lista Over seriella portar fr n COM1 till COM256 1 med hj lp av muspekaren kan du v lja en av dem l ngst ned visas anv nda kommunikationsparametrar som ar fasta Kom ih g att programmet DARDO PLUS PC LITE anv nder f r anl ggningarna enbart seriella portar som konfigurerats inuti programmet inte alla som finns i Windows 4 VIKTIGT D DEN NYA SERIELLA PORTEN M STE INFOGAS SAMBAND MED INSTALLATIONEN AV DARDO PLUS PC LITE PA OVERVAKNINGSDATORN VIKTIGT U ANSLUTNING VIA RS232 ETHERNET OMVANDLARE AR M JLIG BARA OM MAN TIDIGARE INSTALLERAT AVSEDDA DRIVRUTIN SE HANDBOKEN FOR RS232 ETHERNET OMVANDLAREN Radera en kommunikaitonsport Med detta kommando kan man radera en av kommunikaitonsportarna som definierats i programmet DARDO PLUS PC LITE om den inte ar kopplad till nagon anlaggning Remove communications port EN Choose Com Port to Remove Cancel Remove Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider SV 11 Electric Anlaggning Infoga anlaggning Ef
170. ing Vem v nder sig handboken till Handboken vander sig huvudsakligen till installatonspersonal som har kunskaperna for att under betryggande s kerhet gripa in p b de h rd och mjukvarusystem Programvaran DARDO PLUS PC LITE har t nkts och utvecklats av SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC for att berika och g ra mera flexibel systemet for kontroll av styrenheter i DARDO PLUS serien Med den har applikationen kan anv ndaren hantera kontrollera och programmera namnda anordningars funktion Med programmet kan anvandaren forbereda en hierarkisk layout Over lampornas och styrenheternas placering s att den exakta punkten dar ett fel intraffar l tt och snabbt kan lokaliseras Anvandaren kan hantera kontrollera och programmera verksamheten de enskilda DARDO PLUS styrenheterna Applikationen garanterar optimal Oversikt Over systemets och lampornas status Applikationen visar och memorerar inuti historiken alla larm och oregelbundenheter som systemet upptackt Med programmet DARDO PLUS PC LITE kan du programmera intervallet f r styrenheternas Funktions och Brinntidstester samt k ra interaktiva kommandon med samma funktioner som styrenheternas kontrollpaneler Testresultat och eventuella oregelbundenheter de kontrollerade systemen registreras av DARDO PLUS PC LITE s att operat ren kan s ka detaljer och skriva ut rapporter om de registrerade h ndelserna Applikationen garanterar optimal Oversikt Over systemets och lampornas status Applikationen visar
171. ingens datum och tid st mmer eller inte med programmets inst llningar Kommandon Du kan st lla in datum tid och periodicitet f r b de Funktionstester 1 och Brinntidstester 2 f nstret med kommandon f r Funktionstest och Brinntidstest kan man st lla in samtliga parametrar f r dessa kontroller bl a testperiod i dagar 3 varaktighet i minuter 4 datum 5 och starttid 6 i timmar och minuter Den h r programmeringen ndrar den p styrenheten inst llda programmeringen SV 16 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Beskrivning av kommandon Tesblockering accepeteras inte om e styrenheten redan r i statuset blockering aktiv kortslutning p lampkontrollinjen Avaktivera blockering accepeteras om o styrenheten r i statuset blockering aktiv Controls on control unit 1 E Acquistion Y Enter Set date and time Set test 0 00 00 Functional tests Operating time test Length of test period in days 1 Test duration in minutes He U KRIER Time of test 00 00 00 00 start day and month 01401 WEIEN Restore accepteras om e styrenheten ar i statuset blockering aktiv Rest eller Utility ingen kortslutning p lampkontrollinje Funktionstesten accepeteras inte om e blockeringsstatus aktivt funktionstest pagar brinntidstest udda eller jamna lampor pagar kortslutning pa lampkontrollinjen Brinntidstest jamna lampori Brinntidstes udda la
172. ings Percentage threshold of value of broken lamps Current threshold value 50 New threshold value 50 cancel IT 30 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Delta E il numero massimo di minuti di sfasamento consentiti fra la periodicit dei TEST impostata nel DARDO PLUS PC LITE e quella programmata all interno della centralina In pratica la massimo differenza in minuti che si vuole accettare tra l orologio all interno del PC e quello all interno della Centralina Dardo Parameters TimeQut Duration Level Names Log Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings Maximum delta of counters in minutes Current value 10 Mew value 10 a Impostazioni Selezionando il riquadro Tooltip immagini si ha la possibilit di abbinare unimmagine grafica ad ogni oggetto centralina o lampada Dardo Parameters TimeOut Duration Level Names Log Acquisition attempts Threshold Celta Settings Iw Tooltip images Server Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider IT 31 E Electric Esempio di posizionamento del cursore in prossimita dell icona DARDO PLUS Esempio di posizionamento del cursore in prossimita dell icona lampada selezionata vedere il bordo blu con spessore maggiore Fel V eal el el poll fll P a o a E Per associare un immagine ad una lampada necessario 1 posizionare il cursore sul sinottico della lampada 2 cliccare su di esso per fare comparire il me
173. introduit son propre profil a l aide du mot de passe correspondant 7 ainsi que celui des utilisateurs g n riques chaque utilisateur devra avoir recours aux informations en question pour pouvoir acc der au programme DARDO PLUS PC LITE Pour supprimer ou modifier un nom il faut d abord s lectionner avec la souris la cl situ e dans la colonne 8 a gauche de la ligne relative a l utilisateur Modifier le mot de passe Change Password E Old password p New password Contirm new password Ce menu permet de modifier rapidement le mot de passe du profil avec lequel on accede au programme Le menu Change password modifier le mot de passe ne s active que si on entre dans le programme en utilisant un profil configur dans la List of authorizations Liste autorisations Pour modifier le mot de passe il faut entrer l ancien mot de passe le nouveau puis confirmer ce dernier FR 26 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider amp Electric Options Pour permettre au programme de contr ler les syst mes le mieux possible modifier le nombre d essais a effectuer pour la connexion le nombre de connexions pr vues la dur e de l acquisition etc Outre la modification de la langue de lecture de l interface il est possible d ins rer des notes qui s affichent et signalent l op rateur des particularit s ou des op rations sp cifiques au syst me File Configuration Authorizations Nes Modify paramete
174. ion 8 Les tests d autonomie et de fonctionnement aussi bien programm s que manuels sont inhib s l entr e de commande il y a un signal de 24Vcc et tant que ce signal reste activ le poste envoie la commande de test aux lampes la dur e du signal d termine le type de test test de fonctionnement ou d autonomie l entr e de commande il y a un signal de 24Vcc et apr s que le passage d un tat d absence du signal a un tat de pr sence a t relev le poste envoie la commande RESTORE RESTAURATION aux lampes l entr e de commande il y a un signal de 24Vcc et apr s que le passage dun tat d absence du signal a un tat de presence a t relev le poste envoie la commande Utility Utilitaire inhibition de l tat de secours La ligne de communication avec les lampes est en court circuit Les lampes reli es la suite d un test pr sentent une d faillance Quelques unes ou toutes les lampes configur es ont communiqu au poste absence du r seau de recharge D tection d une erreur de communication s rie La condition de signal activ survient quand la case en regard de l inscription est s lectionn e Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Autorisations Les utilisateurs du programme sont soit des administrateurs soit des utilisateurs g n rigues gui ont chacun un mot de passe L administrateur peut intervenir sur n importe quelle fonction l invit a des possibilit
175. ions u File Pa Schneider Open System Remove System Properties En cliquant sur un objet syst me le contour du rectangle devient bleu pour signaler la s lection effectu e En cliquant avec le bouton droit de la souris sur un objet systeme s lectionn un menu s ouvre pour pouvoir effectuer les op rations suivantes e Ouvrir le systeme 8 quivaut a un clic sur la fleche passer au niveau suivant pour visualiser les postes qui y sont appliqu s e Supprimer le systeme 9 s lectionn guivaut a un clic sur le bouton Supprimer d crit au paragraphe Boutons de commande e Propri t s 10 visualise les informations relatives au syst me s lectionn une fen tre s ouvre affichant les configurations et toutes les descriptions attribu es au systeme ce qui quivaut a clic sur le bouton Propri t s pr sent sur la fen tre principale et d crit dans le paragraphe Boutons de commande Properties System EI Properties System General Contacts General Contacts Name Schneider Bi installation 02 07 2008 9 25 28 Connection Serial port 1200 E 7 2 COM 1 j r External Contacts Acquisition Enabled Change connection Description Internal Contacta Change Contacts Dardo Plus PC LITE FR 13 Schneider Entr e des postes Apre
176. ionsfel funktionsfel i programmet handelser som har med styrenheterna att gora h ndelser som har med lamporna att g ra Handelser som galler styrenheter och lampor ar i sjalva verket registreringar av statusandringar i resp egenskaper 29 Med fellistan 30 kan du v lja bara felhandelser eller bara informationsh ndelser Med anv ndarlistan kan du v lja bara h ndelser som g ller en viss anv ndare 31 Fr n Till g r att du kan v lja poster inom en viss period 32 Med Meddelande kan du v lja poster med samma beskrivning 33 Med Noter kan du v lja poster som infogats en not 34 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider SV 43 Electric Schneider Electric Industries SAS 89 boulevard Franklin Roosevelt F 92500 Rueil Malmaison France tel 33 0 1 41 29 85 00 http www schneider electric com Cod PSW001070 Ed 00 07 2008
177. ired Defaultdministrator 31082007 9 03 26 SERVERI Fist OM true Default dministrator 314082007 9 03 26 SERVERI Fist DM L mprequired Diefault dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 26 SERVER First M Lamprequired O Default amp dministrator 31708 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist M 30 La mprequired Delul dministr t t _ 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist M o D tru Default amp dministrator 31 06 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist Doo BR need Default amp dministrator 3108 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First M Lampeter Default dministratar 31 06 2007 9 03 24 SERVERI Fist M B Lamprequired O _ Defaul amp dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First M o D Lamprequired Default dministratar 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERWER First MJ o o D Lampreqguired O Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First M B Lamprequired Default dministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First M EE Lamprequired O Default amp dministrator 3108 2007 9 03 23 SERVER Fist M Di Lampreguied Defaults dirinistratnr _ 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M D tru Default amp dministrator 3109 2007 9 03 21 SERVERI First MoO S Lampreguiied Defaulk amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M o o S O tru Default amp dministrator 31708 2007 9 03 21 SERVERI First mM LLemprened o o Defaul amp dministrator
178. irst M EE Lamprequired O Default amp dministrator 3108 2007 9 03 23 SERVER Fist M Di Lampreguied Defaults dirinistratnr _ 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M D tru Default amp dministrator 3109 2007 9 03 21 SERVERI First MoO S Lampreguiied Defaulk amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M o o S O tru Default amp dministrator 31708 2007 9 03 21 SERVERI First mM LLemprened o o Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M D Lamprequired Default amp dministrator 312082007 9 03 20 SERVER First mM B Lamprequired _ o Default amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M o O J Sa Lamprequired O Default amp dministrator 314082007 9 03 20 SERVERI Fist Ot B Lamp regured O Defaul amp dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M o D i Lamprequiredo _ Default amp dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERWER Fist M E Lamp regured O Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M arp required _ Default amp dministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M Lamp required Default dministrator EE U e DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 8 53 46 Default amp dministrator Control unit route LEVEL SERVER First FloorDardo Plus 1 Number of records 52 10 Antal handelser 1 visar antalet handelser loggtabellen K
179. isku se zobraz okno v n m je t eba zvolit tisk rnu P ed tisknut m je t eba zvolit n jakou tisk rnu ale je mo n rovn program opustit bez tisknut a to stisknut m tla tka Vyj t 9 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 41 d Electric CA Printer settings List of fields Total pages Print fram page To page na 16 lill Lines printing per row of data gt 1 7 F Last lind printin Jo Description i I Y aF w Print graphics LL LL LL 18 20 Spacing 0 characters Select all 13 Remove selection Character Arial 10 Boldface Italics Printer Print Gurt 21 22 23 24 Na lev stran se bude nach zet seznam sloupk m ky kter chcete vytisknout Kliknut m my i na n zev pol ka m ete zvolit pol ko kter chcete vytisknout Dal m kliknut m volbu zru te 11 Tla tka Zvolit v e 12 a Zru it volbu 13 kter se nach zej pod seznamem umo uj zvolit v echna pol ka nebo tuto volbu zru it V horn sti obrazovky se budou zobrazovat sla ozna uj c celkov po et stran 14 po te n stranu 15 a konec tisku 16 kter u ivatel m e zvolit Jeliko m sto kter tisk jedn dky dat zab r na vyti t n str nce se m e li it podle velikosti znak nebo ky i orientace str nky m e se st t e s rie dat bude zab rat v ce ne jednu dku tisku Zvolen pol ka se budou
180. ispozici a kter u ivatel m e nadefinovat v menu Zm na parametr Jestli e u ivatel odpov ano na ot zku kter se zobraz v okn p ed ukon en m programu dojde k zaz lohov n kopie datab ze do slo ek s n zvem tvo en m slem odpov daj c m dni t dnu Tento soubor se naz v dardoLite mdb Z lohov n datab ze je mo n prov st i pomoc tla tka Backup datab ze Zaznamenan ud losti jsou spojen s fungov n m programu nap klad e Otev en i zav en programu e stav komunikace e zm na stavu d c ch jednotek nebo lamp Signalizace se m e t kat chyb nebo upozorn n Okno zen ud lost je mo n otev t dvojkliknut m na li tu 1 zobrazen posledn chyby nebo upozorn n ve o spodn sti obrazovky EZ Z t to str nky je mo n vyhled vat a tisknout jednotliv z znamy V p pad e program zjist n jakou ud lost bude signalizovat zaznamen n t to ud losti a za ne vyd vat pravideln se opakuj c zvuk grep Ize jej nakonfigurovat jako funkci v menu Funkce Parametry Log Krom t to zvukov signalizace se na dce ok nka Log ud losti zobraz erven troj heln k Tato signalizace z stane p tomna dokud oper tor nestiskne tla tko Uznat v menu Log ud lost Vyhled v n ud lost EH Login Default amp dministrator Dvojklikem na ok nko 1 log ud lost se otev e okno
181. ito de realizar modifica es para melhorar seus produtos sem nenhum aviso pr vio Por isso pode ocorrer que as ilustrac es do manual n o correspondam exactamente ao aparelho fornecido Certificar se de que todo acr scimo ou actualizac o feita pelo fabricante seja inserido e integrado neste manual de instru es Conservac o do manual O manual deve ser conservado para futuras consultas por toda a vida til do aparelho e deve estar dispon vel para todas as opera es ou posteriores reinstalac es do aparelho Dardo Plus PC LITE PT 1 Schneider Simbologia usada Dentro dos manuais de instruc es usada uma s rie de s mbolos gue serve para chamar a atenc o para sugest es notas recomendac es e normas relativas ao uso correcto e a seguranca da aplicac o al m da seguranca f sica do operador A seguir apresentamos um resumo da simbologia principal Notas gerais i NOTA OU NORMA OPERATIVA GERAL Sinais de aviso de perigo para a pessoa e ou para o aparelho forma triangular N PERIGO GERAL PARA A PESSOA E OU PARA O APARELHO Avisos V Para informa es t cnicas relativas instala o ao uso do produto ou em caso de problemas entre em contacto com a SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC v O funcionamento correcto do produto s pode ser garantido se ele for usado com aparelhos de emerg ncia SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC V A eliminac o do produto deve ser feita conforme as normas de preservac o ambiental vigentes no pa s d
182. l Names Log Current timeout value in seconds f 45 Mew timeout value in seconds 45 ES ES This parameter is used to configure the delay in seconds before the program starts in automatic mode When a password is not typed in the opening window automatic entry will be in guest mode Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Electric EN 27 Duration This parameter is used to set the following e the length of the delay in seconds after a command is transmitted before continuing with further operations 1 e the delay in tenths of a second between two acquisition cycles 2 e the delay in milliseconds for the internal timer of the acquisition motor to pass the interrogation between one control unit and another 3 Dardo Parameters E Acquisition attempts Settings TimeDut Duration Level Names Log fv Do not end application after cycle number Wal after control in seconds 30 Delay between two acquisitions in tenths of a second g Acquisition timer period m2 1000 Cancel EN 28 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Level Names This is the name for the first level for example Province From the second level onwards the level names are predefined because they correspond to the structure of the systems Select the default boxes to use the names Level 1 and Level 2 Dardo Parameters Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings TimeDut Duratio
183. l users each user must use this information to enter the DARDO PLUS PC LITE program To remove or modify a name use the mouse to select the key in the column 8 to the left of the line corresponding to the user Change Password Change Password E Old password m Mew password Contirm new password This menu is the quick way to change the password for the profile used to enter the program The Change Password menu is only enabled if a profile inserted in the List of Authorisations is used to enter the program To change the password enter the old password the new password and then confirm the new one EN 26 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Options To allow the program to perform checks on the systems in the best way possible you can change the number of attempts to make the connection the number of connections allowed the duration of the acquisition etc As well as changing the language of the interface you can insert notes which appear and advise the operator of details or operations specific to the system File Configuration Authorizations Mana Ty lar i Modify parameters Language Warnings The Options menu has four submenus Modify Parameters 1 e Language 2 e Warnings 3 Modify Parameters Use this menu to modify the parameters used to manage DARDO PLUS PC LITE Time Out Dardo Parameters Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings TimeOut Duration Leve
184. lac o a selecc o feita faz com que o contorno do guadrado se torne azul Ao clicar com a tecla direita do mouse num objecto da instalac o seleccionado abre se um menu que permite efectuar as seguintes opera es e Abre instala o Open system 8 equivale a premer a flecha passa ao pr ximo nivel para visualizar as centrais aplicadas nela e Elimina instala o Remove system 9 seleccion lo equivale a premer o bot o Elimina descrito no par grafo Bot es de comando e Propriedades Properties 10 mostra as informa es sobre a instala o seleccionada abre se a janela que mostra as defini es e todas as descri es que foram definidas no sistema e equivale a premer o bot o Propriedades presente na janela principal e descrito no par grafo Bot es de comando Properties System EI Properties System General Contacts General Contacts Name Echneider j El Installation 02 07 2008 9 2528 Connection serial port E 1200 E 7 2 COM 1 Acquire Acquisition Enabled Change connection Description Internal Contacte External Contacts Change Contacts i Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider PT 13 Electric Inserc o das Centrais Depois de ter inserido a instalac o definido o tipo de comunicac o e algumas caracter sticas poss vel inserir as centrais necess rio instruir o programa e coloc lo em c
185. lampy budou zobrazovat se synoptick mi panely na nich bude vid t slo pod n m byly zaznamen ny a u d c ch jednotek se bude zobrazovat slo linky 1 nebo 2 a po et lamp na lince Barva z vis na stavu zaznamenan m d c jednotkou po funk n m testu nebo po testu autonomie Synoptick panel m e zobrazovat je t dal podrobnosti Zvol te li prav m tla tkem funkci vlastnosti zobraz se okno kter obsahuje popis technick informace a stav lampy a p padn zaznamenan probl my Zvolen lampa se od ostatn ch lamp odli uje ir m okrajem 1 o E Signalizace synoptick ho panelu platn pro v echny d c jednotky Barevn li ta 2 ve spodn sti synoptick ho panelu ozna uje stav lampy a m e se r zn zabarvovat Blikaj c ern ed jestli e je lampa nakonfigurovan ale nen p tomn v konfiguraci d c jednotky ed jestli e je lampa p tomn v konfiguraci ale nereaguje erven jestli e je lampa z vadn lut jestli e je lampa mimo autonomii Zelen v ostatn ch p padech tj jestli e je v e v po dku Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 35 Electric P klad lampy kter je v po dku po funk n m testu 01411 Plant Schneider General Technical Data Status Lampy ovl dan DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT Krom v e uveden ch informac se li ta 1 m e zabarvit i jinak 01152 Pl
186. lectric DARDO PLUS STYRENHET Kontroll sjalvmatade lampor DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT ar en styrenhet for Overvakning av sjalvmatade lampor med programmering av funktions och brinntidstester samt tillhorande datum tid och periodicitet Den har styrenheten ar mottaglig for interaktiva kommandon For att infoga styrenheten klicka pa bakgrunden och v lj Infoga styrenhet Ett f nster ppnas och du kan valja vilken typ av apparat som ska infogas i anlaggningen Efter att ha valt apparaten och bestamt styrenhetens adress bekr fta inmatningen med knappen OK Pa bakgrunden visas ett symbolschema av vald styrenhet Symbolschema DO Test in progress Delta Styrenheten har foljande indikeringar defekta 1 e Gront om det inte finns n gra defekta lampor Gult om antalet defekta lampor ligger under parameterinst llningen R tt om antalet defekta lampor ligger ver parameterinst llningen Status 2 Gr nt om indikeringarna p displayen inte visar n gra oregelbudenheter R tt om det f rekommer oregelbudenheter typ kommunikationsfel utility status vilostatus fel n dl ge tesblockering eller kortslutning p lampkontrollkretsen o Gult i alla andra situationer Test p g r 3 R tt test p g r o Gront ingen test pa gang Delta 4 e Rott om skillnaden i datum och tid mellan dator och styrenhet har verskridit parameterinstallningarna Gr nt i motsatt fall Parametern Delta anger om testexekver
187. light with any problems recorded The light selected has a thicker frame 1 than the others C gt Synoptic panel signals valid for all control units The coloured bar 2 at the bottom of the panel indicates light status and is subject to colour change as follows o Flashing Black Grey when the light is configured but the control unit configuration is not present e Grey when the light is present in the control unit configuration but is not responding e Red if the light is faulty e Yellow if the light is out of duration Green under other circumstances i e everything OK Dardo Plus PC LITE EN 35 Schneider Example of light OK following a function test 01411 Plant Schneider General Technical Data Status Lights controlled by DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT As well as the information provided above the bar 1 can also be a different colour 01152 Plant Example of a configured light not responding EN 36 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Electric 01152 Plant gt Example of light en controlled by DARDO PLUS out of duration Dardo Plus PC LITE EN 37 Schneider Light information After starting an acquisition cycle which lets you display the synoptic panels of the connected lights in the specific level of the lights a list is also provided of the connected and non connected lights At the end of the acquisition you can save the information acquired in a text file
188. llowing a FUNCTION TEST or AUTONOMY TEST have reported a fault Emergency 10 Some or all of the lights configured have signalled the absence of the recharging network to the control unit e Communication 11 A serial communication error detected The signal is active when the box next to the writing is selected Dardo Plus PC LITE EN 19 Schneider Electric Test Reports the programmed dates for function 1 and autonomy 3 tests The dates for odd numbered lights autonomy tests are displayed The dates of the even numbered lights autonomy tests can be determined by adding 1 day to the dates displayed EN 20 DARDO PLUS 1 al GEE Functional tests 0 201 2005 03 01 2006 04 01 2006 05 01 2006 06 001 2006 OF MO 2006 UO 2006 09 01 2006 10401 2006 11 01 2006 1201 2006 153 01 2006 19 01 2006 15 01 2006 Operating time test OFA 22007 6 00 00 1448 22007 3 00 00 214 212007 6 00 00 20 1 212007 3 00 00 0401 2006 9 00 00 11 01 2006 5 00 00 10 01 2006 5 00 00 5001 2006 5 00 00 01 02 2006 9 00 00 08 02 2006 5 00 00 15 02 2006 5 00 00 22 02 2006 6 00 00 29 02 2006 6 00 00 0705 2008 6 00 00 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM Remote controlled self contained lights DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM is used to control self contained lights Function and autonomy tests can be programmed on this control unit by configuring the date time and frequency Interactive comm
189. mation ang ende installationen produkternas anv ndning eller vid funktionsfel kontakta SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC v Produkten fungerar korrekt under f ruts ttningen att du anv nder nodbelysningsutrustning fran SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC v Produkten ska avsfallshanteras i enlighet med de miljoskytddsforeskrifter som g ller i anv ndarens land VIKTIGT ATT INTE FOLJA GIVNA INSTALLATIONS OCH BRUKSANVISNINGAR KAN G RA GARANTIN OGILTIG SV 2 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Forpackningens inneh ll ppna f rpackningen och kontrollera att alla komponenter finns med 1 DARDO PC LITE CD skiva 2 Installationshandbok Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider SV 3 Electric Allmant Anlaggningens uppbyggnad Id en som applikationen grundar sig p ar en struktur i flera niv er som framst ller e Anlaggningen anlaggningarna Styrenhetern styrenheterna Lampan lamporna Komponenterna i varje niva kan namnas om for att battre beskriva anlaggningens verkliga utseende Anlaggning Styrenhet Hanterring av anlaggningar Programmet DARDO PLUS PC LITE samtalar med styrenheterna i DARDO PLUS serien s att Overvakning av st rre lampsystem m jligg rs Med den har applikationen kan anv ndaren hantera kontrollera och programmera de enskilda styrenheternas funktion DARDO PLUS PC LITE medger interaktiva kommandon med samma funktioner som styrenheternas kontrollpaneler Testresultat och eventuella oregelbundenheter i de kontr
190. mp test autonomie lich ch lamp nen p ijat jestli e e lampy nejsou pln dobity 24h je aktivn stav zablokov n funk n test pr v prob h test autonomie sud ch nebo lich ch pr v prob h na ovl dac lince lamp je zkrat Rest je p ijat jestli e e existuje pohotovost a na lince Eye nen zkrat Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 17 Electric Obecn vlastnosti DARDO PLUS 1 General Status Test Name Dardo Plus 1 es Address Acquisition cycles LoL DIA Motes Parametr cykly sb ru dat je na za tku nastaven na hodnotu 1 Tento parametr ozna uje etnost prov d n sb ru dat z d c jednotky vzhledem k cykl m prov d n sb ru dat Hodnota 1 znamen e se sb r dat z d c jednotky bude prov d t p i ka d m cyklu sb ru dat Hodnota 2 znamen e se sb r dat z d c jednotky bude prov d t p i ka d m druh m cyklu sb ru dat Hodnota O znamen Ze se sb r dat z d c jednotky nebude prov d t nikdy V ok nku ozna en m 3 oper tor m e z skat pol ko na libovoln popisn pozn mky V ok nku ozna en m 4 oper tor m e m nit adresu zen d c jednotky CS 18 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric Stav e Zablokovani 1 e Funk n test 2 e Test autonomie sud ch 3 e Test autonomie lich ch 4 e Rest mode 5 Restore 6 Utility 7 e Zkrat na lince Dardo eye 8 e
191. mpor accepteras inte om e laddning av lampor inte slutford 24h blockeringsstatus aktivt funktionstest p g r brinntidstest udda eller jamna lampor pagar kortslutning p lampkontrollinjen Rest accepteras om e nodlage men inte Kortslutning Eye linje Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider SV 17 Electric Allm nna egenskaper DARDO PLUS 1 General Status Test Name Dardo Plus 1 es Address Acquisition cycles a C1 Notes Om du markerar l get 1 kan du tilldela ett namn till styrenheten Om du markerar laget 2 kan operatoren andra forvarvfrekvensen for den Overvakade styrenheten Parametern forv rvcykler ar fran b rjan inst lld p v rdet 1 Den har parametern anger hur ofta styrenheten forvarvar data under forvarvcyklerna Vardet 1 anger att man forvarvar data fran styrenheten varje gang man kor en forvarvcykel Vardet 2 anger att man forvarvar data fran styrenheten varannan gang man kor en forvarvcykel Vardet 0 anger iatt data aldrig forvarvas fran styrenheten Om du markerar l get 3 ppnas ett f lt for operat rens beskrivningar och anm rkningar Om du markerar l get 4 kan operat ren byta adressen f r den vervakade styrenheten SV 18 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Status e Blockering 1 e Funktionstest 2 e Brinntidstest j mna lampor 3 Bade manuella och schemalagda brinntids och funktionstester ar blockerade Kopplade lampor som skulle kunna acc
192. n Propriet 3 cliccare sul men per aprire la finestra Propriet Lampada 1 Cliccare sul men Propriet equivale a premere il pulsante Propriet presente sulla finestra principale e descritto nel paragrafo Pulsanti di comando 4 Nella finestra Propriet Lampada selezionare la cartella Generale 2 5 Cliccando il tasto 3 sulla stringa Famiglia compare la finestra Cambia Famiglia 4 in cui possibile scegliere o cambiare la famiglia di appartenenza e l immagine da legare alla lampada opzionale 6 Cliccando il tasto 5 possibile assegnare una descrizione alla lampada 011411 Plant Schneider General Technical Data Status Number mo Name Everlux R4 D Es Family Change family IT 32 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Lingua File Configuration Authorizations Maite Sa mj Modify parameters Warnings Tramite questo menu possibile cambiare la lingua utilizzata Selezionando l opzione Lingua appare una finestra con le bandiere delle varie nazioni un click del mouse su una bandiera imposta la lingua della nazione corrispondente Language Avvertimenti File Configuration Authorizations Mie Sal poe Modify parameters i Language warnings Tramite questo menu si accede ad una finestra con cui e possibile inserire una lista di avvertimenti che compariranno nella barra 1 do
193. n 1 starts the control unit acquisition cycle e Set date and time 2 date and time of PC sent to the control unit Dardo Plus PC LITE EN 21 Schneider Electric Controls on control unit 2 Set date and time General Properties DARDO PLUS RM 1 General Status Test Mame Dardo Plus 1 5 Address Acquisition cycles LI DL Notes Es EN 22 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Select from point 1 to allocate a name to the control unit Select from point 2 to allow the operator to change the acquisition frequency of the control unit under supervision The acquisition cycles parameter is set initially on value 1 This parameter indicates the frequency of data acquisition from the control unit with regard to acquisition cycles Value 1 indicates that data acquisition from the control unit is performed every time an acquisition cycle is executed Value 2 indicates that data acquisition from the control unit is performed every two acquisition cycles Value O indicates that data acquisition from the control unit is never performed Select from point 3 to have an arbitrary descriptive note for the operator Select from point 4 to allow the operator to change the address of the control unit under supervision Status DARDO PLUS RM 1 General Status Test M Inhibition Short eye Fault Emergency Communication
194. n ch za zen Umo uje hierarchicky zobrazit layout um st n lamp a d c ch jednotek tak aby bylo mo n rychle ur it m sto p padn ho v skytu probl m U ivatel m e dit ovl dat a programovat fungov n jednotliv ch d c ch jednotek DARDO PLUS Aplikace umo uje m t neust l p ehled o stavu jednotliv ch syst m a v ech ovl dan ch lamp Aplikace zobrazuje alarmy a syst mem zji t n anom lie a ukl d je do archivu Pomoc DARDO PLUS PC LITE je mo n pl novat pravideln opakov n funk n ch test a test autonomie d c ch jednotek a prov d t interaktivn p kazy ke spou t n stejn ch funkc jako z panel d c ch jednotek Program DARDO PLUS PC LITE zaznamen v v sedky test a p padn anom lie ovl dan ch syst m a umo uje tak oper torovi vyhled vat si a tisknout data o t chto jevech Aplikace umo uje m t neust l p ehled o stavu jednotliv ch syst m a v ech ovl dan ch lamp Aplikace zobrazuje alarmy a syst mem zji t n anom lie a ukl d je do archivu D le itost t to p ru ky Tato p ru ka obsahuje informace nutn k pou it v robku Je zak z no tuto p ru ku nebo jej sti jak mkoliv zp sobem reprodukovat a p ed vat t et m osob m bez p semn ho svolen firmy SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC Firma SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC si vyhrazuje pr vo na prov d n zm n za elem vylep en sv ch v robk a to bez p
195. n Level Names Log Use default for Server Mew name for Server Server Log You can configure the number of records to keep in the Log Events Signals 1 archive Select Beep if you wish to hear an acoustic signal each time a log is stored lts use is optional Dardo Parameters ES Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings TimeOut Duration Level Hames Lag Maximum number of log 3000 1 Beep 2 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider EN 29 EP Electric Acquisition attempts The number of attempts made by the DARDO PLUS PC LITE program to connect with systems to acquire data before communication error status is signalled The number of attempts is set between a minimum of 6 and a maximum of 20 Dardo Parameters Time ut Duration Level Mames Log Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings Current value of acquisition attempts E Mew value of acquisition attempts E Delay cycles after test f r lamp acquisition d Cancel Threshold This value represents the percentage of lights which must be faulty before a system fault signal is given The colour displayed on the synoptic panel of the control units depends on the value set for this parameter For example if the value set is 50 at least 50 of the lights connected must have a fault before the red warning LED is switched ON When the percentage of faulty lights is lower the indicator LED
196. n pour pouvoir visualiser les synoptiques des lampes reli es dans le niveau des lampes pr vu a cet effet une liste des lampes reli es et non reli es est galement disponible est possible de sauvegarder les informations acquises dans un fichier texte en fin d acquisition File Midas Authorizations Options Lamp information New communications port Remove communications pork Substitute modem Apr s l acquisition ce menu permet de visualiser tout ce qui a t relev relativement aux lampes pendant la connexion Control unit route Level OYA Dardo Plus 1 Lamps inserted 41 05 gt 01 Information 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt D1 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt 01 09 gt D01 03 501 e La fen tre permet de lire les informations suivantes FR 38 Les lampes d tect es par le systeme pendant la connexion 1 Les num ros des lampes disponibles pour la connexion 2 L option de sauvegarde de ces donn es sur un fichier texte 3 Schneider save file Dardo Plus PC LITE Ev nements Enregistrement des evenements Le programme enregistre tous les v nements a l aide d une base de donn es appel e FIFO ayant une structure a file circulaire ou le premier v nement enregistr est le premier a tre limin quand il ny a plus d espace disponible Le nombre d
197. n profilo inserito nella Lista Permessi Per modificare la password occorre inserire la vecchia password la nuova e la conferma della stessa IT 26 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider amp Electric Opzioni Per consentire al programma di eseguire le verifiche degli impianti nel nodo pi idoneo epossibile modificare il numero di tentavi per eseguire il collegamento il numero dei collegamenti previsti la durata dell acquisizione etc Oltre alla modifica della lingua di lettura dell interfaccia possibile inserire delle note che appaiono ed avvisano l operatore di particolarit od operazioni specifiche per l impianto File Configuration Authorizations ged zr Modify parameters Language Warnings Il menu Opzioni prevede quattro sottomenu Modifica Parametri 1 e Lingua 2 Avvertimenti 3 Modifica Parametri Usando questo menu si possono modificare i parametri che regolano il funzionamento di DARDO PLUS PC LITE Time Out Dardo Parameters Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings TimeOut Duration Level Names Current timeout value in seconds 45 Mew timeout value in seconde 45 Ez ES Parametro da configurare per definire l attesa in secondi prima che il programma parta in modo automatico nel caso non si digiti la password nella finestra d ingresso ingresso automatico avverr in modalit ospite Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider IT 27 Electric
198. nal n r Overg ngen mellan signalens fr nvaro och signalens n rvaro avk nns skickar styrenheten kommandot Utility blockering av nodl ge Kommunikationslinje med lamporna ar kortslutad Kopplade lampor signalerar en oregelbudenhet efter en Test N gra lampor har meddelat styrenheten att uppladdningsstr m saknas Fel har uppt ckts i seriell kommunikation Signalen r aktiv om rutan bredvid texten ar bockad Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Behorighet tillst nd Programmets anvandare kan vara antingen adimistrator eller standard anvandare var och en har sitt eget losenord Administrat ren kan gripa in p vilken funktion som helst g sten har d remot begr nsade m jligheter starta eller stoppa dataf rv rvet visa redan inmatade beskrivngar och anm rkningar kvittera h ndelserna File Configuration AE Options List of authorizations Change password Harifran skots alla hanteringsatgarder som galler anvandare som ar auktoriserade att arbeta med programmet Menyn Behorighet innehaller tva undermenyer e Lista Over behorigheter 1 e Byta l senord 2 Lista over behorigheter User Permits username ea pesen I l Guest Generic Guest Administrator Manager Remove Modification Genom det har f nstret kan du l gga till en ny anv ndare 1 ta bort 2 eller redigera 3 listan Over behoriga anvandare for DARDO PLUS PC LITE Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider SV 25 amp Electric
199. nappen S kerhetskopiera 2 sparar en kopia p loggtabellens inneh ll som visas just n r knappen p verkas Kopian sparas i mappen som bar programmets namn Filen heter log txt faltena separeras med allts ett format som ven kan anv ndas av MS Excel Knappen Radera 3 raderar valda poster Flyttar du muspekaren ovanp posterna meddelanderader och h ller knappen CTRL intryckt kan du ka antalet utvalda f lt F r att radera alla poster utan att beh va markera dem en i taget r cker det att du f rst trycker p knappen Markera allt 8 Knappen Noter 4 l ter dig associera ett kommentar till ett eller flera f lt Poster v ljs ut genom att h lla knappen CTRL intryckt och v nsterklicka p yabellens v nstra kant Poster med noter har en asterisk i b rjan p beskrivningen Knappen Kvittera 7 tar bort den r da ikonen i rutan 1 och det eventuella pipljudet eftersom h ndelsen har kvitterats med andra ord terst lls systemet fr n feltillst ndet Styrenhetens s kv g 10 anger vilken anl ggning den p tabellen valda styrenheten r ansluten till Knappen Skriv ut 5 skiver ut data som valts i tabellen F re sj lva Utskriftsf nstret visas f nstret f r val av skrivare F r att skriva ut m ste du v lja en skrivare men du kan ven avsluta programmet utan att skriva ut med knappen Avsluta 9 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider SV 41 BEI Electric WA Printer settings List of fields Total page
200. ne tutte le lampade sono visualizzate con sinottici all interno del quale sono visibili la numerazione con cui e stata registrata e nel caso di centraline il numero di linea 1 o 2 ed il numero di lampade della linea Il colore funzione dello stato registrato dalla centralina dopo un Test Funzionale o dopo un Test di Autonomia Il sinottico pu visualizzare ulteriori dettagli Selezionando con il tasto destro la funzione propriet mostrata una finestra contenente la descrizione le informazioni tecniche e lo stato della lampada con gli eventuali problemi registrati La lampada selezionata si distingue per la cornice 1 pi spessa rispetto alle altre o E Segnalazioni del sinottico valide per tutte le centraline La barra colorata 2 presente in basso nel sinottico indica lo stato della lampada e pu assumere colorazioni diverse o Lampeggiante Nero Grigio quando la lampada e configurata ma non e presente nella configurazione della centralina Grigio quando la lampada presente nella configurazione ma non risponde Rosso se la lampada guasta Giallo se la lampada fuori autonomia Verde negli altri casi cio tutto OK Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider IT 35 d Electric Esempio di lampada OK in seguito ad un test funzionale 01411 Plant Schneider General Technical Data Status Lampade controllate da DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT Oltre alle indicazioni gi fornite in prec
201. nistrator 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVERI First mi D Lamprequied Default dministrahor 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVERI First mi meet Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 23 SERVER First II PU Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 06 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First Mf BO Jlamprequied Deiadbbdntrtiso 91 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First ON meet Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M BA Lamprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVERT First ON Lamprequied Defaul dministrator 31 06 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First II Se Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERI First mi Z L mprequired Detaull dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERT First II D Jlamprequied JDetaut dministator 51 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERI First ON 2 pred Delauk dministratar 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M 2 Lampreguied O 1 Defaul amp dministatoo 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERI First ON i L mprequired O Default amp dministator AA as a 3108 2007 9 03 18 SERVERT First O efault dministrator 317082007 3 03 18 SERVERI Pal of 31 0872007 8 5346 D 31 08 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M Di DefaultAdministratar D a i Login Default amp dministrator Default amp dministrator Control unit route LEVEL SERVER First FloorDardo Plus 1 Number of rec
202. nistrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVER First II Jlamprequied Detault dministator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVERI First ON L mprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 24 SERVER First II D Jlamprequied Default inistrator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First ON BB L mprequired Default inistrator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First II Pi Jlamprequied Deiadbdntrtialo 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First M BY Lampreguied Detault dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 23 SERVER First ON BB Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First O A lampreguied Detault dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVERI First mi D Lamprequied Default dministrahor 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVERI First mi meet Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 23 SERVER First II PU Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 06 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First Mf BO Jlamprequied Deiadbbdntrtiso 91 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First ON meet Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M BA Lamprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 21 SERVERT First ON Lamprequied Defaul dministrator 31 06 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First II Se Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERI First mi Z L mprequired Detaull dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERT First II D Jlamprequied JDetaut dministator
203. nna rt a 21 Bel d ul DEE 21 Rule NEE Ad e CN 25 LIST OT GUN OTIS GU ONS ria 25 JE ad Ile a NEW USC s tatiana 26 Change Password i duu ad 26 OPUONS an E M P ian 27 ACGUISIOT savana aaa a ad di 34 Eilenger 35 LIGNE INTO MAN EE 38 EV E p KROK M an 39 Schneider EP Electric Introduction This section must be read before any other documentation and before performing any type of operation on the product About this instruction manual Who this manual addresses This manual is intended for installation personnel with sufficient knowledge to work safely on hardware and software systems DARDO PLUS PC LITE has been conceived and developed by SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC to extend control of the DARDO PLUS control units and make it more flexible The application allows the user to handle control and program the operation of the devices indicated The program can be used to represent the layout of the lights and control units hierarchically in order to identify guickly the point at which faults arise The user can handle control and program the operation of the individual DARDO PLUS Control Units The application provides a view of the status of each system and all the controlled lights The application displays and stores in a memory all the alarms and faults detected by the system DARDO PLUS PC LITE can be used to program the frequency of the Function Tests and Autonomy Tests on the control units and for interactive control offering the same func
204. non perfetta corrispondenza fra le illustrazioni del manuale ed il prodotto fornito Assicurarsi che ogni eventuale emendamento o aggiornamento fornito dal costruttore venga inserito ed integrato nel presente manuale istruzioni Conservazione del manuale Il manuale deve essere conservato per future consultazioni per tutta la durata della vita del prodotto e deve essere reso disponibile per ogni intervento o successiva re installazione del prodotto stesso Dardo Plus PC LITE IT 1 Schneider Simbologia utilizzata All interno del manuale istruzioni sono utilizzati una serie di simboli che servono a richiamare l attenzione su suggerimenti note prescrizioni e norme che riguardano il corretto uso e la sicurezza dell applicazione oltre che l incolumit fisica dell operatore Di seguito elencato un compendio della principale simbologia Note generali E NOTA O NORMA OPERATIVA GENERALE Segnali di avvertimento di pericolo per la persona e o per l apparecchiatura forma triangolare N PERICOLO GENERALE PER LA PERSONA E O PER L APPARECCHIATURA Avvertenze Y Per informazioni tecniche relative all installazione l uso del prodotto o in caso di difetto rivolgersi a SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC V Il corretto funzionamento del prodotto legato unicamente all impiego di apparecchi di emergenza SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC v Lo smaltimento del prodotto deve essere effettuato in conformit con le norme per la tutela dell ambiente vigenti nel
205. nstallazione dell impianto con modalit dipendenti dal tipo di centralina Rotary switch o inizializzazione All interno del DARDO PLUS PC LITE necessario riportare gli indirizzi configurati nelle centraline e Centraline DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT lampade autoalimentate queste tipologie di centraline sono indirizzabili da 001 a 255 decimale con numerazione casuale e Centraline DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM Controllo remoto lampade autoalimentate queste tipologie di centraline sono indirizzabili da 001 a 255 decimale con numerazione casuale Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider IT 15 Electric DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT Controllo lampade autoalimentate DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT e una centralina abilitata alla supervisione di lampade autoalimentate dove e possibile programmare test funzionali e i test di autonomia configurandone data ora e periodicita Su questa centralina e possibile inviare comandi interattivi Per inserire la centralina cliccare sullo sfondo selezionare Inserisci centralina Si apre la finestra che permette la scelta del tipo di apparato da inserire nell impianto Dopo avere eseguito la selezione e definito l indirizzo della centralina confermare l inserimento premendo il pulsante OK Sullo sfondo compare il sinottico corrispondente alla centralina selezionata Sinottico DP 1 5 Broken 3 States DO Test in progress Delta La centralina ha le seguenti indicazioni guaste 1 e Verde se
206. ntrol units making it possible to monitor a light system on a large scale The application allows the user to handle control and program the operation of the individual control units DARDO PC LITE can be used for interactive control using the same functions available on the control panels of the control units Test results and any faults to the systems controlled are recorded by the DARDO PC LITE program thus enabling the operator to search for and print the acquired events For more information on the features of the individual control units refer to the paragraph Types of control units managed EN 4 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Using the Software First Startup In the operating system startup menu select the Programs menu then select the group of SCHNEIDER programs then open the Dardo Plus PC Lite folder unless the path and or name have been changed during installation and start the DARDO PLUS PC LITE program The following window is displayed Dardo PC Lite XXX Enter User Hame and Password User name si Password ee E Enter a user name and password to gain access to the program Program start data select User Name 1 gt Admin Password 2 gt Admin CAUTION m CHANGE THE PASSWORD THE FIRST TIME YOU ACCESS THE SYSTEM U This initial setting enables access by the administrator with full authority over program management If a user name and password are not entered then the program is
207. o 21 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVERT First II B Jlamprequied O S Defic tt 1 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First ON Jlamprequsad Detault dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First ON Jlamprequied Deiadbdntrtialo 31 08 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First II 9 Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 08 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First mi Jlamprequied Default dministrator 3170872007 8 53 46 Legis Defayt dministato DefaultAdministrator Control unit route LEVEL ISERWER1 First Flooribardo Plus 1 Number of records i pe E eg sons As colunas cont m os seguintes dados da esquerda para a direita Data e hora de registo do evento usando o formato de data breve do painel de controlo 2 Nome da instala o system 3 N o usado 4 Endere o da central Cont 5 N o usado 6 N o usado 7 N mero l mpada Unidade de ControloDardo plus Lam DP 8 Nome associado a l mpada name 9 Descric o do evento description 10 Utilizador que registou o evento user 11 PT 40 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Bot es da janela Registo Eventos Event log e busca Com os bot es presentes na parte de baixo da janela poss vel executar a gest o de todos os eventos registados na base de dados e visualizados na janela Event log Ed Date System MI Cont Di Lan LamDP Hame Description User 31082007 9 03 26 SERVER First M oo J
208. o Parameters Acquisition attempts TimeOut Duration Level Names Lag fv Do not end application after cycle number Wal after control in seconds 30 Delay between two acquisitions in tenths of a second g Acquisition timer period m2 1000 PT 28 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Nomes dos n veis o nome que se deseja usar para o primeiro n vel por exemplo Prov ncia Do segundo n vel em diante os nomes dos n veis s o predefinidos pois correspondem a estrutura das instalac es Ao seleccionar os quadrados de default s o usados os nomes N vel 1 e N vel 2 Dardo Parameters Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings Timelut Duration Level Names Log Use default for Server Mew name for Server Server Cancel Registo Log E poss vel configurar o n mero de registos que se deseja conservar no arquivo dos Registo Eventos Sinaliza es 1 a selec o em Beep indica a presen a de um sinal sonoro a cada registo seu endere o facultativo 2 Dardo Parameters X Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings TimeOut Duration Level Hames Lag Maximum number of log 5000 1 Beep o 2 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider PT 29 d Electric Tentativas de aguisic o Acguisition attempts o n mero de tentativas de conex o s instalac es efectuadas pelo programa DARDO PLUS PC LITE para adquirir o
209. obrazit rove syst mu e Tla tko 11 umo uje zobrazit rove d c jednotky e Tla tko 12 umo uje zobrazit n sleduj c rove Tla tka jsou aktivn pouze v p pad jestli e do rovn na n se nach z te byl vlo en alespo jeden objekt E STAR Ok nko stavu System Level Level 1 Heu ame ardo Plus 1 III Ok nka stavu mohou b t n sleduj c rove 1 ozna uje zobrazovanou rove Pokud se nach z te na rovn E zobrazuj se syst my na D ws r H rove 3 se zobrazuj jednotliv lampy Zaznamen n posledn ud losti A Vedle zobrazen zaznamen n posledn ud losti se nach z ikona 2 Logo se m n podle typu ud losti Zm na ikony na erven troj heln k 3 signalizuje e byla zaznamen na chybov ud lost kter je t nebyla syst mem uzn na V tomto p pad bude DARDO PLUS PC LITE vyd vat pravideln zvukov sign l bude li toto nastaven aktivn CS 8 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric o Datum a hodina posledn ho sb ru dat 4 Upln path n zvu d c jednotky z n prob h sb r dat 5 Stav sb ru dat B e 6 Ikona zobrazuje hodiny jestli e se sb r dat nach z ve vy k vac m cyklu e 7 Ikona zobrazuje rovku a skupinu lamp jestli e prob h sb r dat o stavu lamp e 8 Ikona zobrazuje erven kole ko jestli e prob h sb r dat o stavu d c
210. odificar o n mero de tentativas para realizar a conex o o n mero das conex es previstas a durac o da aquisic o etc Al m da mudanca da l ngua de leitura da interface poss vel inserir notas que aparecem e avisam o operador de detalhes ou opera es espec ficas da instala o File Configuration Authorizations Nes Ty lar i Modify parameters Language Warnings O menu Opc es possui quatro submenus Modifica Par metros 1 L ngua 2 Avisos 3 Modifica Par metros Usando este menu pode se modificar os par metros que regulam o funcionamento do DARDO PLUS PC LITE Time Out Dardo Parameters Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings TimeOut Duration Level Names Current timeout value in seconds 45 Mew timeout value in seconde 45 Ez ES Par metro a configurar para definir a espera em segundos para que o programa inicie de modo autom tico se n o for digitada a senha na janela de entrada a entrada autom tica acontece na modalidade convidado Dardo Plus PC LITE PT 27 Schneider Durac o Com este par metro pode se definir e O n mero de segundos de espera ap s o envio de um comando antes de continuar com outras operac es 1 e os d cimos de segundo de espera entre dois ciclos de aquis o 2 e espera em mil simos de segundos para o timer interno do motor de aquisi o na passagem de interrogac o entre uma central e outra 3 Dard
211. ollerade systemen registreras av DARDO PLUS PC LITE s att operat ren kan s ka detaljer och skriva ut rapporter om de registrerade handelserna For ytterligare information om den enskilda styrenhetens egenskaper var god och referera till avsnittet Hanterbara styrenheter SV 4 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Electric Anvandning av programvaran Forsta start operativsystemets startmeny v ljer du menyn Program h rifr n v lj programgruppen SCHNEIDER och Oppna mappen Dardo Plus PC Lite vi antar att du under installationen inte har ndrat mappens namn och eller sokvag och starta programmet DARDO PLUS PC LITE Det forsta som visas i programmet ar fonstret Dardo PC Lite XXX Enter User Hame and Password User name password se E For att komma t programmet kr vs inmatning av ett anv ndarnamn och ett l senord Data for programstart v lj Anvandarnamn 1 gt Admin Losenord 2 gt Admin VIKTIGT d KOM IH G ATT ANDRA L SENORDET F RSTA G NGEN DU KOMMER IN O SYSTEMET Beskriven initialinst llning medger tkomst som administrator och ger de h gsta privilegierna for programmets hantering Om ingenting v ljs startar programmet automatiskt efter n gon sekund med standardanv ndarens profil Du kan andra vantetiden 3 fore programmets automatiska start fran konfigurationsparametrarna Systemets tva anvandarnivaer karakteriseras enligt foljande Administratorer Kan visa samtliga p
212. ommunications port EN Choose Com Port to Remove Dardo Plus PC LITE EN 11 Schneider Electric System Inserting a System After defining which communication port to use for the system and the features it must have you can insert the system and start to define its features The window displays the list of communication ports from which to choose one to use it also shows the port previously selected when the new communication port was defined and this is the one to choose Input window E Insert system Name Neweblame Choose a Port W Enable acquisition Description A Internal Contacte External Contacts In the System level right click on the background and select Insert system A window opens and asks you to set the communication port and all the descriptions needed to make the system unique Type the name of the system in the Name box Choose a communication port not yet used from those listed in the Choose a port box Select the Enable acquisition option to enable data acquisition from the system Type a brief description of the system in the Description box optional Enter the names of Internal Contacts and External Contacts in the dedicated boxes optional In the Description and Contacts spaces you can enter the system address and the names of the maintenance staff for example When the data has been entered and confirmed using the OK button the system is displayed in the
213. on LevelNames Lo Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings Current value of acquisition attempts E Me value of acquisition attempts D Delay cycles after test f r lamp acquisition d Threshold seuil Cette valeur d termine le pourcentage de lampes d fectueuses pouvant tre accept avant qu il y ait une signalisation de d faillance sur un syst me La couleur affich e par le synoptique des postes d pend de la valeur s lectionn e pour ce param tre Par exemple si la valeur s lectionn e est 50 au moins 50 des lampes reli es doivent tre d fectueuses pour que la led rouge de panne s allume Quand le pourcentage d appareils d fectueux est inf rieur au pourcentage configur la LED de signalisation est jaune Dardo Parameters Time ut Duration I Level Names Log Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings Percentage threshold of value of broken lamps Current threshold value 50 Mew threshold value St FR 30 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE TP Electric Delta diff rence C est le nombre maximum de minutes de d phasage admis entre la p riodicit des TESTS configur e dans DARDO PLUS PC LITE et la p riodicit programm e l int rieur du poste En fait il s agit de la diff rence maximale en minutes admissible entre l horloge interne du PC et celui du poste Dardo Parameters o Tea Duration LevelNames Acquisition attempts Threshol
214. ondic o de ver e identificar as centrais Na janela que aparece no v deo presente a lista dos tipos de centrais que podem ser seleccionadas entre as guais escolher as utilizadas para compor a instalac o Insert control unit Control unit type DARDO PLUS Control unit name Dardo Plus 1 1 Address Posicionando se no n vel Grupo centrais visualizado ao abrir a instalac o ou premendo a flecha para frente flecha direita descrita no par grafo Bot es de comando clicando no fundo com o bot o direito do mouse pode se seleccionar Insere central Abre se a janela que permite escolher o tipo de aparato a inserir na instala o 1 Os tipos de aparatos seleccion veis s o centrais da fam lia Dardo Depois de ter feito a selec o necess rio definir o endere o Address 2 da central antes de confirmar sua inser o pressionando o bot o OK No fundo aparece o sin ptico 3 correspondente central seleccionada DP 1 WW Broken 3 States 3 Test in progress Delta Para maiores detalhes sobre caracter sticas de cada central consultar o par grafo Tipos de centrais geridas As centrais s o visualizadas num quadrado que tem na parte de cima uma sigla de identificac o da central e um s rie de leds que assumem cores diferentes dependendo do estado da central Quando inicia a aquisi o ocorre a actualiza o do estado dos leds presentes no
215. ons port Remove communications pork Menu konfigurace obsahuje t i podmenu kter umo uj vkl dat ru it a nebo m nit typ komunikace mezi PC a syst mem e Novy komunika n port 1 e Zru en komunika n ho portu 2 CS 10 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric Vlo en nov ho komunika n ho portu 1 Mew communications port E Choose communications Port 1200 E 72 V tomto menu je mo n do konfigurace programu vlo it nov komunika n port jen zvol te z t ch kter jsou p tomny na PC Program zobraz seznam s riov ch port od COM1 do COM256 1 a my bude mo n z nich jeden zvolit dole se zbrazuj pou it komunika n parametry kter jsou st l P ipom n me e program DARDO PLUS PC LITE m pro syst my k dispozici pouze s riov porty kter jsou nakonfigurov ny v programu a ne tedy v echny porty p tomn ve Windows i UPOZORN N W NOV S RIOV PORT MUS B T VLO EN B HEM INSTALACE DARDO PLUS PC LITE NA PC ZEN UPOZORN N Y P IPOJEN POMOC KONVERTORU RS232 ETHERNET JE MO N POUZE PO NAISTALOV N KOMUNIKA N HO DRIVERU VIZ P RU KA KONVERTORU RS232 ETHERNET Zru en komunika n ho portu T mto p kazem je mo n zru it komunika n port kter byl nadefinov n v programu DARDO PLUS PC LITE pokud k n mu nen p ipojen dn syst m Remove communications port EN Choose Com Port to R
216. ontrollrutan aktivera f rv rv ar bockad SV 12 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Anlaggningarna visas i form av en lang rektangel som p v nster sida inneh ller namnet och en fyrkant 7 som har olika f rger beroende p anl ggningens status Fargerna har foljande beydelse e Blinkande Svart Gr tt nar anl ggningen nnu inte har konfigurerats och f rv rvats e Blinkande Gratt Rott om ett objekt i n sta niv har en r d eller gul signalering e Gr nt om alla objekt p n sta niv bara har gr na signaleringar File Configuration Authorizations Options Schneider Open System Remove System Properties Klickar du p ett anlaggnings objekt visas det uforda valet genom att tyrkantens ram vaxlar till bl tt Hogerklickar du p ett valt anlaggnings objekt ppnas en meny som tillater forljande funktioner e Oppna anl ggning 8 samma som pilknappen ga till n sta niv f r att visa tillh rande styrenheter e Ta bort anl ggning 9 samma som knappen Ta bort som beskrivis i avsnittet Kommandoknappar e Egenskaper 10 visar information om vald anlaggning fonstret som visar installningarna och samtliga inmatade beskrivningar motsvarar allts knappen Egenskaper p huvudf nstret som beskrivs i avsnittet Kommandoknappar Properties System x Properties System General Contacts General Contacts Internal Contacts Name Schneider E Installation
217. ords peso C vm EEE Le colonne da sinistra verso destra contengono i seguenti dati Data e ora di registrazione del evento utilizzando il formato di data breve del pannello di controllo 2 Nome dell impianto 3 Non utilizzato 4 Indirizzo della centralina 5 Non utilizzato 6 Non utilizzato 7 Numero lampada Dardo plus Control Unit 8 Nome associato alla lampada 9 Descrizione dell evento 10 Utente che ha registrato l evento 11 IT 40 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Pulsanti della finestra Log Eventi e ricerca Con i pulsanti presenti nella parte bassa della finestra possibile eseguire la gestione di tutti gli eventi registrati nel data base e visualizzati nella finestra Event log Ed Date System MI Cont Di Lan LamDP Hame Description User 31082007 9 03 26 SERVER First M oo J Lamprequired Default dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 26 SERVER Fist M A Lamprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERVER Fist M 8 tru _ Default amp dministrator 31708 2007 9 03 26 SERVERI Fist mM Z L mprequired Diefault dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 26 SERVER Fist M A Lamprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist M sni DefaulkAdministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist M D true Default amp dministrator 312082007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist TI DM oo BR ne
218. orta del PC sar abbinata all impianto tra quelle ancora libere per abbinare ad ogni impianto un collegamento specifico che non possa essere scambiato con altri Il collegamento potr essere locale mediante un collegamento seriale o remoto mediante un collegamento via Ethernet Nel caso di utilizzo di un cavo RS232 tra il PC e la serie di centraline si trover anche un convertitore RS232 RS485 Nel caso di utilizzo di un cavo RJ45 e di un allacciamento alla rete LAN sar presente nell impianto un CONVERTITORE Ethernet RS232 Il funzionamento attraverso il CONVERTITORE Ethernet RS232 abilitato nel caso in cui sia installato sul PC il DRIVER opportuno si veda Manuale CONVERTITORE Ethernet RS232 Authorizations Options a Lar Lamp information New communications port Remove communications port Il menu di configurazione presenta tre sottomenu che consentono di inserire eliminare e o modificare il tipo di comunicazione presente tra PC ed impianto e Nuova porta di comunicazione 1 e Elimina porta di comunicazione 2 IT 10 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Inserimento nuova Porta di Comunicazione Mew communications port E Choose communications Port 1200 E 72 Usando questo menu possibile inserire nella configurazione del programma una nuova porta di comunicazione fra quelle presenti sul PC ll programma presenta una lista di porte seriali da COM1 a COM256 1 con
219. os ao funcionamento do programa Podem ser por exemplo e A abertura ou o fecho do programa e o estado da comunica o e uma mudan a de estado das centrais ou das l mpadas As sinaliza es podem ser erros ou avisos Para abrir a janela de gest o dos eventos basta clicar duas vezes na barra 1 de visualiza o do ltmo erro ou aviso situada na parte de baixo da tela o EZ Nesta p gina poss vel efectuar buscas e imprimir os registos log Se tiver sido detectado um evento o programa sinaliza o registo e emite um bip peri dico configur vel como op o no menu Op es Par metros Registo Al m desta sinaliza o sonora aparece um tri ngulo vermelho na linha de registo eventos Esta sinalizac o permanece presente at que um operador prema a tecla Reconhece no menu registo eventos Busca dos eventos EH Login Default amp dministrator Ao clicar duas vezes em 1 log dos eventos abre se a janela de gest o dos registos Dardo Plus PC LITE PT 39 Schneider Event log Date System M Cont Lil Lon LamDP Name Description O 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERWER First M LOBO Lamprequired O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVER First M A Jlamprequied O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVERT First ON Jlamprequied O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERVER First ii Jlamprequied Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SE
220. ouleur verte lorsque l afficheur ne pr sente aucune situation de d faillance Couleur rouge lorsque des d faillances surviennent erreurs de communication tat d utilitaire tat de repos d faillance tat de secours inhibition tests court circuit sur la ligne de contr le des lampes Couleur jaune dans les autres cas Test en cours 3 o Couleur rouge test en cours e Couleur verte aucun test en cours Diff rence 4 e Couleur rouge lorsque le d phasage de date et heure entre le PC et le poste d passe la valeur param tr e o Couleur verte dans le cas contraire Le parametre Delta difference indique si les dates et l heure d ex cution des tests correspondent ou non aux configurations du programme Commandes Il est possible de configurer la date l heure et la p riodicit des tests de fonctionnement 1 et d autonomie 2 Dans la fen tre des commandes relatives aux Tests de fonctionnement et aux Tests d autonomie il est possible de configurer de fa on complete tous les parametres relatifs aux contr les tels que la p riode de test en jours 3 la dur e du test en minutes 4 l heure du test 5 exprim e en heures et minutes et la date de d part 6 Cette programmation a pour effet de modifier la programmation configur e dans le poste FR 16 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Description des commandes La commande d inhibition du test n est pas accept e si o le
221. panel of the selected control unit in all control modes and a menu opens in which you must select Commands 2 DP 1 Broken Commands ke Test in progress Open Control Unit Remove Control Unit Properties EN 34 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider A window opens in which you must select Acquisition and start it by pressing the Send button 3 Controls on control unit 1 Acquisition F Acquisition Inhibit test Disable inhibit Restore Functional tests Even lamps autonomy test Odd lamps autonomy test Rest Test duration in minutes 5 0 Time of test 00 00 00 00 start day and month 01 01 01 101 2008 From the commands choose 4 the command to send Lights Light synoptic panel signals To display the status of the lights linked to a given control unit select the control unit and start data acquisition using the special command When acquisition is complete all the lights are displayed using synoptic panels showing the numbering with which the light was recorded and in the case of control units the line number either 1 or 2 and the number of lights on the line The colour depends on the status recorded by the control unit after a Function Test or an Autonomy Test The synoptic panel may display further details Select the properties function with the right hand key and a window opens containing the description technical information and status of the
222. platn mi v zemi kde je pou v n UPOZORN N NEDODR EN INSTRUKC K INSTALACI A POU IT P STROJE VEDE K POZBYT PR VA NA Z RUKU CS 2 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric Obsah balen Otev ete balen a zkontrolujte zda je dod vka pln 1 CD DARDO PC LITE 2 Instala n p ru ka Electric Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 3 Obecn informace Organizace syst m P edkl dan aplikace se zakl d na struktur ln organizaci o r zn ch rovn ch kter p edstavuj Syst m y Ridici jednotku y Lampu y Prvky jak koliv rovn mohou b t p ejmenov ny a p edstavovat fyzickou skute nost syst mu Syst m i AJ dici notka Je O je Lampy zen syst m Program DARDO PLUS PC LITE je schopen komunikovat s d c mi jednotkami skupiny DARDO PLUS co umo uje v irok m rozsahu monitorovat syst m lamp Tento program umo uje u ivateli dit ovl dat a programovat fungov n jednotliv ch d c ch jednotek Pomoc DARDO PLUS PC LITE je mo n prov d t interaktivn p kazy a spou t t stejn funkce jako z panel d c ch jednotek Program DARDO PLUS PC LITE zaznamen v v sedky test a p padn anom lie ovl dan ch syst m a umo uje tak oper torovi vyhled vat si a tisknout data o t chto jevech Podrobnosti o vlastnostech jednotliv ch d c ch jednotek naleznete v odstavci Druhy zen ch
223. plingar forvarvets varaktighet m m Du kan ocksa andra spraket som meddelanden och dylikt visas pa samt mata in anmarkningar och kommentarer som informerar operatoren om speciella egenskaper eller atgarder som galler anlaggningen File Configuration Authorizations Mana Ty lar i Modify parameters Language Warnings Menyn Alternativ innehaller fyra undermenyer e Redigera parametrar 1 e Spr k 2 e Varningar 3 Redigera parametrar Fr n den h r menyn kan du redigera parametrarna som styr DARDO PLUS PC LITE programmets funktion Time Out Dardo Parameters Acquisition attempts Threshold Celta Settings TimeOut Duration Level Names Current timeout value in seconds 45 Mew timeout value in seconds 45 Za Med den h r parametern best ms v ntetiden i sekunder innan programmet startar i automatiskt d inget l senord matas in i accessfonstret detta sker automatiskt om tkomst sker som g st Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider SV 27 Electric Varaktighet Med den h r parametern kan du st lla in e Vantetiden i sekunder innan man efter ett kommando kan ga vidare med ytterligare tg rder 1 e tiondelssekunder man ska vanta mella tv forvarvcykler 2 e millisekunder som forvarvmotorns interna timer ska v nta innan forfragning av n sta styrenhet kommer ig ng 3 Dardo Parameters E Threshold Delta Acquisition attempts Sn TimeOut Duration
224. r 2 indica que executada a aquisic o dos dados da central a cada dois ciclos de aquisic o O valor 0 indica que nunca executada a aquisic o dos dados da central Ao seleccionar o ponto 3 poss vel ter um campo arbitr rio de notas descritivas para o operador Ao seleccionar o ponto 4 poss vel ao operador mudar o endereco da central supervisionada PT 18 Schneider d Electric Dardo Plus PC LITE Estado e Inibi o 1 e Teste de Funcionamento 2 e Teste de autonomia pares 3 Os testes de autonomia e de funcionamento tanto os definidos por calend rio como os manuais s o inibidos As l mpadas conectadas que est o em condic o de aceitar o comando est o em Teste de Funcionamento As l mpadas pares conectadas que est o em condic o de aceltar o comando est o em Teste de Autonomia DARDO PLUS 1 Eg General status Test Inhibition Functional tests Even autonomy test Odd autonomy test Rest mode Restore Utility Short eye Faut Emergency Communication e Teste de autonomia impares 4 Rest mode Modo de repouso 5 e Restore Restabelece 6 Utility Servico 7 e Curto circuito na linha Dardo eye 8 Anomalia 9 e Emerg ncia 10 e Comunicac o 11 Dardo Plus PC LITE As l mpadas mpares conectadas que est o em condi o de aceitar o comando est o em Teste de Autonomia As l mpadas con
225. r exemplos seleccionando o nome de uma instalac o 25 na lista das centrais Control unit 26 ser o encontradas as pertencentes aquela instalac o e a eventual lista de l mpadas associadas Lamp 27 Uma lista n o seleccionada significa que todos os elementos est o compreendidos H quatro tipos de eventos Event 28 erros de comunicac o erros de funcionamento do programa eventos ligados as centrais eventos ligados as l mpadas Os eventos ligados s centrais e as l mpadas s o registos de mudanca de estado das respectivas caracter sticas 29 A lista de erros Error 30 permite escolher somente eventos de erro ou somente eventos informativos A lista utilizador permite escolher somente os eventos ligadas a um certo utilizador User 31 De A From To permite seleccionar os registos de um per odo 32 Mensagem permite seleccionar os registos que tem a mesma descric o Message 33 Note permite seleccionar os registos aos quais esta associada uma nota 34 Dardo Plus PC LITE PT 43 Schneider OVO R 1 Navod K POUZIU urssivsire inni za ada ii 1 IOP MUS y II A eo E RE OO E 1 D le itost t to p ru ky s ssrserssrssrerserrerrerrerrerrrrrrr rer rr rr RR KARA RR ARKA RKA RS 1 UCROVAnE DORE ae O O 1 el TEE de Le UE 2 UNOZO MON assis ari a voi 2 Obsah Dale ainia 3 Obecne1ntormMace suse aaa E 4 Organizace SYSI MU crisis 4 zen sys LOM EEN 4 POUZIL SON Walls 5 PI VII S N EE D AVE OKNO
226. raline fare riferimento al paragrafo Tipi di centraline gestite IT 4 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Utilizzo del Software Primo Avvio Nel menu di avvio del sistema operativo selezionare il menu Programm al suo interno selezionare il gruppo di programmi SCHNEIDER quindi aprire la cartella Dardo Plus PC Lite a meno che in fase di installazione non sia stato cambiato il percorso e o il nome ed avviare il programma DARDO PLUS PC LITE Alla partenza il programma visualizza la finestra Dardo PC Lite XXX Enter User Hame and Password User name password se E Per l accesso al programma si richiede l inserimento di un nome utente e di una password Dati di partenza programma selezionare Nome Utente 1 gt Admin Password 2 gt Admin ATTENZIONE d SI CONSIGLIA DI MODIFICARE LA PASSWORD AL PRIMO ACCESSO AL SISTEMA L impostazione iniziale descritta permette l accesso come administrator con le massime autorizzazioni alla gestione del programma stesso Nel caso non sia selezionato nulla il programma parte automaticamente dopo alcuni secondi con il profilo d utente generico Il tempo di attesa 3 prima della partenza del programma in modo automatico pu essere variato utilizzando le opzioni di configurazione Le caratteristiche dei due livelli utente sono Amministratori E possibile visualizzare tutti i dati del programma con l abilitazione alle impostazioni ai comandi ed con
227. rat h ndelsen 11 SV 40 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric Knappar i f nstret Handelselogg och s kning Med hj lp av knapparna i fonstrets nedre del kan man hantera alla h ndelser registrerade i databasen och visade i fonstret Event log x Date System HJ Cont D Lan Lam DP Name Description User 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERVERT First M J Lamprequired Default dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 26 SERVER Fist Of Lamprequired Defaults diministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERVER Fist M o o 8 Lamprequired Default dministrator 31708 2007 9 03 26 SERVERI Fist mM L mprequired Diefault dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 26 SERVER Fist M A Lamprequired Deiauk dmtrtstator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist DI 30 La mprequired Diefault dministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist M D true Default amp dministrator 312082007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist TI DM oo BR ned Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 24 SERVER Fist M o J Di Lamprequired Default dministratar 31 06 2007 9 03 24 SERVERI First M B Lamprequired O _ Defaul amp dministrator 3108 2007 9 03 23 SERVER Fist M D Lamprequired Default dministratar 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERWER First MJ o o D Lampreqguired O Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First M B Lamprequired Default dministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVER F
228. re visibile il numero di pagine totali 14 e la pagina d inizio 15 e fine stampa 16 selezionabili dall utente Poich l occupazione di pagina nella stampa di una riga di dati varia al variare della dimensione del carattere della larghezza di pagina dell orientamento della pagina sono possibili casi in cui la serie di dati occupi pi di una riga in stampa La stampa dei campi scelti sar distribuita su pi righe della pagina in modo consecutivo Il riquadro Righe in stampa per riga di dati fornisce il numero di pagine righe necessarie 17 e l occupazione percentuale dell ultima 18 La casella di controllo Stampa grafica 19 va selezionata quando si utilizzano stampanti laser o a getto d inchiostro Tale opzione realizza una stampa di qualit migliore con linee di divisione e riquadri dei titoli con sfondo grigio Sulle stampanti ad aghi comporta tempi d attesa notevolmente pi lunghi La lista di selezione dell interlinea 20 permette di selezionare la distanza fra due righe di dati Tale distanza pu essere annullata portata a mezzo carattere oppure a un carattere intero La parte in basso della finestra visualizza le impostazioni del carattere di stampa Il pulsante Carattere 21 consente la scelta del tipo dello stile della dimensione del carattere Utilizzando un carattere con il simbolo di stampante la stampa pu risultare pi veloce in particolare per le stampanti ad aghi possibile riaprire la finestra per sele
229. rique les alarmes et les d faillances relev es par le syst me Importance du manuel Le pr sent manuel d instructions contient les informations n cessaires a l utilisation du produit Toute reproduction et transmission des tiers du pr sent manuel entier ou partiel sans une autorisation crite de SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC est interdite SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC se r serve le droit d apporter des modifications sans avis pr alable afin d am liorer ses produits Par cons quent les illustrations du manuel pourraient ne pas correspondre parfaitement au produit fourni S assurer que toute correction ou toute mise jour fournie par le constructeur est toujours ins r e et int gr e dans le pr sent manuel d instructions Conservation du manuel Le manuel doit tre conserv pour qu il soit possible de le consulter pendant toute la dur e de vie du produit il doit aussi tre accessible pour chaque intervention ou r installation du produit en question Dardo Plus PC LITE FR 1 Schneider Pictogrammes utilis s Le manuel d instructions comprend une s rie de pictogrammes qui attirent l attention sur des suggestions notes prescriptions et normes concernant l utilisation correcte de application les conditions de s curit et l int grit physique de l op rateur Les pictogrammes principaux sont indiqu s ci apres Notes g n rales E NOTE OU NORME DE FONCTIONNEMENT GENERALE Pictogrammes d avertissement en cas de danger pour
230. ritto ed inserire la password Schneider IT 7 d Electric ATTENZIONE IL PULSANTE RIPRISTINO DATABASE SOVRASCRIVE L ULTIMA COPIA ESEGUITA DEL i DATABASE A QUELLA IN USO LE EVENTUALI MODIFICHE APPORTATE TRA IL MOMENTO tag IN CUI E STATA ESEGUITA LA COPIA ED IL MOMENTO IN CUI ESSA VIENE CARICATA ANDRANNO PERSE DIO d O Pulsanti di livello e Pulsante 10 permette di visualizzare il livello impianto e Pulsante 11 permette di visualizzare il livello centralina e Pulsante 12 permette di visualizzare il livello successivo tasti sono attivi solo nel caso sia stato inserito almeno un oggetto nel livello in cui ci si trova Caselle di stato System Level Level Tem ame D ardo Plus 1 III Le caselle di stato presentano i seguenti riguadri Livello 1 Indica il livello visualizzato Se siamo a Livello 1 sono visualizzati gli impianti a livello impianto Livello 2 sono visualizzate le singole centraline al livello centralina Livello 3 sono visualizzate le singole lampade Registrazione dell ultimo evento A A fianco della visualizzazione della registrazione dell ultimo evento presente un icona 2 Il logo cambia secondo il tipo di evento se l icona diventa rossa a forma di triangolo 3 segnala che stato registrato un evento di errore non ancora riconosciuto In tal caso DARDO PLUS PC LITE emette anche periodicamente un segnale sonoro se l impostazione
231. rogram je rovn mo n opustit tla tkem Vyj t popsan m v odstavci Ovl dac tla tka Configuration Authorizations Options EM Re imy fungov n Program DARDO PLUS PC LITE m e pracovat ve dvou r zn ch re imech podle toho zda je aktivn sb r dat nebo ne e V p pad e sb r dat nen aktivn a program byl otev en pod profilem spr vce je mo n prov d t zm ny konfigurace struktury apod e NV p pad Ze je sb r dat aktivn nen mo n prov d t zm ny konfigurace Komunika n porty Syst m se skl d z d c ch jednotek k nim jsou p ipojeny lampy Programu je t eba podat takov informace aby byl schopen rozpoznat tento syst m je t p ed jeho vlastn m nadefinov n m V programu bude t eba definovat jak voln port PC bude p i azen syst mu nebo ka d mu syst mu mus b t p i azeno speci ln nezam niteln p ipojen Toto p ipojen m e b t m stn pomoc s riov ho p ipojen nebo d lkov p es Ethernet P i pou it kabelu RS232 bude mezi PC a d c mi jednotkami pou it i konvertor RS232 RS485 P i pou it kabelu RJ45 a p ipojen k s ti LAN bude v syst mu pou it KONVERTOR Ethernet RS232 P ipojen p es KONVERTOR Ethernet RS232 bude fungovat v p pad bude li na PC nainstalov n p slu n DRIVER viz p ru ka KONVERTOR Ethernet RS232 Authorizations Options SH Lamp information New communicati
232. rogramdata och har tillstandet att hantera inst llningar och kommandon kan starta och stoppa en forvarvcykel Administratoren kan kora alla atgarder i synnerhet andra objekternas och nivaernas egenskaper samt definiera nya anvandare Gaster Kan visa samtliga programdata starta och stoppa forvarvcykeln Om data som matats in vid installationen ar felaktiga Oppnas ett fonster for ny inmatning av programvarans aktiveringskoder vid programmets start Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider SV 5 Electric kod 1 1SSS kod 2 Ex Kund 3456 345678 Ze Lite C Map Customer z ass 1 z 2 DE Huvudfonster Kommandoknapparna f renklar och snabbar p utforandet av vissa tg rder flera kr ver att man h gerklickar p objektet i fr ga File Configuration Authorizations Options stem Level Login Default amp dministrator SV 6 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Knapparna har foljande betydelse e Knappen Ny 1 Knappen Radera 2 Knappen Egenskaper 3 Knappen Starta forvarv 4 Knappen Stoppa forvarv 5 e Knappen Avsluta 6 infogar en ny anl ggning eller styrenhet i sk rmen Vilken typ av objekt som infogas beror p vilken niv man befinner sig i raderar det p sk rmen markerade objek
233. rogramu a spou t t a zastavovat cyklus sb ru dat Pokud nejsou data vlo en p i instalaci spr vn p i spu t n programu se zobraz okno do n ho je t eba zadat aktiva n k dy softwaru Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 5 Electric P kl Z kazn k k d 1 1SSS 3456 345678 o lle Map Customer isss 1 i 2 DK Hlavn okno Pomoc ovl dac ch tla tek je mo n rychle prov d t n kter operace p i mnoh ch z nich se pou v prav tla tko my i na objektech File Configuration Authorizations Options ustem Level EE Login Default dministrator oe Dardo Plus PC LITE CS 6 Schneider amp Electric Tla tka maj n sleduj c v znamy Tla tko Nov 1 Tla tko Zru it 2 Tla tko Vlastnosti 3 Tla tko Spu t n sb ru dat 4 Tla tko Zastaven sb ru dat 5 Tla tko V stup 6 umo uje na obrazovku vlo it nov syst m nebo d c jednotku Druh vlo en ho objektu z vis na rovni na n se nal z te umo uje smazat na obrazovce zvolen objekt umo uje zobrazit vlastnosti objektu zvolen ho na obrazovce umo uje spustit sb r dat umo uje p eru it sb r dat V tomto p pad se v echny p kazy prob
234. rs Language Warnings Le menu Options pr voit quatre sous menus Modifier les param tres 1 e Langue 2 Avertissements 3 Modifier param tres Ce menu permet de modifier les param tres qui d terminent le fonctionnement de DARDO PLUS PC LITE Time out temps coul Dardo Parameters Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings TimeOut Duration Level Names Current timeout value in seconds 45 Mew timeout value in seconds 45 E Param tre a configurer pour d finir la temporisation en secondes qui doit s couler avant que le programme d marre automatiguement si le mot de passe n est pas entr dans la fen tre pr vue a cet effet l entr e a lieu automatiquement en mode invite Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider FR 27 TP Electric Duration dur e Ce param tre permet de configurer e le nombre de secondes d attente apr s l envoi d une commande avant de poursuivre d autres op rations 1 e les dixiemes de seconde d attente entre deux cycles d acquisition 2 e attente exprim e en milli mes de seconde pour le temporisateur interne du moteur d acquisition pour la requ te d un poste l autre 3 Dardo Parameters Acquisition attempts TimeOut Duration Level Names Lag fv Do not end application after cycle number Wal after control in seconds 30 Delay between two acquisitions in tenths of a secon
235. s Print fram page To page na 16 gt lill Lines printing per row of data gt 1 7 ae Last ling printin ay Description JS i IP W Print graphics LLLLLLLLLLL Spacing 0 characters hd 20 Select all 13 Remove selection Character Arial 10 Boldface Italics Printer Print Gurt 21 22 23 24 P v nster sida finns en lista ver kolumnerna i den tabell man vill skriva ut Klicka p f ltets namn f r att v lja vilka f lt som ska skrivas ut Klickar du igen avmarkeras f ltet 11 Knapparna Markera allt 12 och Avmarkera 13 under sj lva listan anv nds f r att v lja resp v lja bort samtliga f lt P den vre delen finns dettotala sidantalet 14 och utskriftens start 15 och slutsidor 16 som v ljs av anv ndaren En datarad som skrivs ut tar olika stor plats p papperet beroende p flera faktorer teckenstorlek sidbredd sidans orientering Av denna anledning kan det h nda att en viss datagrupp skrivs ut p mer n en rad Valda f lt f rdelas och skrivs ut p flera rader i rak f ljd F ltet Rader per datarad anger antalet sidor rader som kr vs 17 samt den procentuella upptagningen av den sista sidan 18 Kontrollrutan Grafisk utskrift 19 v ljs om man anv ndar laser eller bl ckstr leskrivare Med detta alternativ f r utskriften h gre kvalitet med delningslinjer och inramade titlar mot gr bakgrund P n lskrivare inneb r detta betydligt l ngr
236. s vyskytovat anom ln stav minim ln na 50 p ipojen ch lamp Pokud je procento p stroj s anom ln m stavem ni ne nastaven hodnota kontrolka signalizace bude sv tit lut Dardo Parameters TimeDut Duration Level Names Threshold Delta I Settings Acquisition attempts Percentage threshold of value of broken lamps Current threshold value 50 New threshold value 50 a dali CS 30 Schneider Electric Dardo Plus PC LITE Delta Maxim ln doba v minut ch povolen ho rozd lu mezi pravideln m opakov n m TEST nastaven m v DARDO PLUS PC LITE a hodnotou naprogramovanou v d c jednotce Prakticky se jedn o maxim ln rozd l v minut ch kter jste ochotn p ijmout mezi hodinami uvnit PC a hodinami uvnit d c jednotky Dardo Parameters TimeQut Duration Level Names Log Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings Maximum delta of counters in minutes Current value 10 Mew value 10 a Nastaven Zvolen m ok nka Tooltip obr zky m te mo nost jednotliv m objekt m d c jednotce nebo lamp p i adit grafick zobrazen Dardo Parameters TimeOut Duration Level Names Log Acquisition attempts Threshold Celta Settings Iw Tooltip images Server Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 31 Electric DP 1 P klad um st n kurzoru Broken u ikony DARDO PLUS
237. s PC LITE UNIDADE DE CONTROLO RM DARDO PLUS Controlo remoto l mpadas auto alimentadas UNIDADE DE CONTROLO RM DARDO PLUS uma central usada para l mpadas auto alimentadas na qual poss vel programar os testes de funcionamento e os testes de autonomia configurando data hora e periodicidade dos mesmos Nesta central poss vel enviar comandos interactivos Ao clicar no fundo selecciona se Inserir central abre se a janela que permite escolher o tipo de aparato a inserir na instalac o Depois de ter feito a selecc o necess rio definir o endereco da central e confirmar sua inser o premendo o bot o OK No fundo aparece o sin ptico correspondente central seleccionada Sin ptico DP DM 2 W Broken O States O Test in progress W Delta A central tem as seguintes indicac es danificadas broken 1 e Verde se n o h l mpadas danificadas e Amarelo se h um n mero de l mpadas danificadas inferior ao limite definido nos par metros o Vermelho se h um n mero de l mpadas danificadas superior ao limite Estados States 2 Verde se as indica es do display n o apresentam situa es de anomalia e Vermelho se n o houver condic es de anomalia como erros de comunicac o estado de servico utility estado de repouso rest anomalia emerg ncia testes inibidos curto circuito na linha de controlo das l mpadas e Em caso contr rio amarelo Teste em curso
238. s auto alimentadas na qual poss vel programar os testes de funcionamento e os testes de autonomia configurando sua data hora e periodicidade Central habilitada para a supervisao de l mpadas auto alimentadas envio de comandos tanto atrav s do teclado como do supervisor e colecta de dados de estado da l mpada a partir do supervisor Nesta central poss vel enviar comandos interactivos UNIDADE DE CONTROLO RM DARDO PLUS central usada para l mpadas auto alimentadas na qual poss vel programar os testes de funcionamento e os testes de autonomia configurando data hora e periodicidade dos mesmos Central habilitada para a supervis o de l mpadas auto alimentadas envio dos comandos mediante presenca de tens o de 24 Vdc em determinadas entradas Nesta central n o poss vel enviar comandos interactivos Configurac o dos enderecos das centrais Os enderecos das centrais s o definidos em fase de instalac o com modalidades que dependem do tipo de central Rotary switch ou inicializac o Dentro do DARDO PLUS PC LITE necess rio indicar os enderecos configurados nas centrais e UNIDADES DE CONTROLO DARDO PLUS l mpadas auto alimentadas estes tipos de centrais podem ter enderecos de 001 a 255 decimal com numerac o casual e UNIDADES DE CONTROLO RM DARDO PLUS Controlo remoto de l mpadas auto alimentadas estes tipos de centrais podem ter enderecos de 001 a 255 decimal com numerac o casual Dardo Plus PC LITE PT 15
239. s avoir entr le systeme et apres avoir defini le type de communication ainsi que certaines caract ristiques il est possible d entrer les postes est n cessaire d duquer le programme pour qu il puisse voir et identifier les postes La fen tre affich e pr sente la liste des types de postes s lectionnables parmi lesquels il est possible de choisir pour r aliser le systeme Insert control unit Control unit type DARDO PLUS Control unit name Dardo Plus 1 1 Address Se positionner au niveau du Groupe de postes leguel apparait apres avoir ouvert le systeme ou press la fleche avant fleche a droite d crite au paragraphe Boutons de commande cliguer ensuite sur Varri re plan avec le bouton droit de la souris pour s lectionner Insert control unit Entrer un poste une fen tre s ouvre ou il est possible de s lectionner le type d appareil a entrer dans le syst me 1 Les types d appareils s lectionnables sont des postes de la famille Dardo Apr s avoir effectu la s lection d finir l adresse 2 du poste puis confirmer l entr e a l aide du bouton OK Un synoptique 3 apparait correspondant au poste s lectionn DP 1 SoBroken o States E Test in progress c Delta Plus plus de d tails sur les caract ristigues des diff rents postes consulter le paragraphe Types de postes g r s Les postes sont visualis s dans un encadr pr sentant dans sa p
240. s dados antes de sinalizar o estado de erro de comunicac o As tentativas s o definidas por um m nimo de 6 e um m ximo de 20 Dardo Parameters TimeOut Duration Lewel Names Acquisition attempts ete Delta Settings Current value of acquisition attempts E Me value of acquisition attempts D Delay cycles after test f r lamp acquisition d Limite Percentage Threshold Este valor determina que percentual de l mpadas em anomalia aceito antes de uma sinaliza o de problema numa instala o A cor que aparece no sin ptico das centrais depende do valor definido neste par metro Por exemplo se o valor definido 50 antes que o led vermelho de problema acenda pelo menos 50 das l mpadas conectadas devem apresentar anomalia Quando o percentual de aparelhos em anomalia inferior ao definido o led de sinaliza o assume a cor amarela PT 30 Dardo Parameters TirneO ut Duration Level Hames Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Percentage threshold of value of broken lamps Current threshold value 50 New threshold value 50 Log Settings cancel Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Delta o n mero m ximo de minutos de defasagem permitidos entre a periodicidade dos TESTES definida no DARDO PLUS PC LITE e a programada na central maximum delta of counters in minutes Na pr tica a diferenca m xima gue se deseja aceitar entre o rel
241. s de 001 a 255 valeur d cimale avec une num rotation al atoire e Postes DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM Contr le distance lampes auto aliment es ces types de postes sont adressables de 001 a 255 valeur d cimale avec une num rotation al atoire Dardo Plus PC LITE FR 15 Schneider DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT Contr le des lampes auto aliment es DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT est un poste concu pour la surveillance de lampes auto aliment es o il est possible de programmer les tests de fonctionnement et dautonomie en configurant leur date leur heure et leur p riodicit Sur ce poste il est possible de lancer des commandes interactives Pour entrer le poste cliquer sur l arri re plan et s lectionner Insert control unit Entrer un poste Une fen tre souvre ou il est possible de s lectionner le type d appareil a entrer dans le systeme Apres avoir effectu la s lection et apres avoir d fini l adresse du poste confirmer l entr e a l aide du bouton OK Un synoptique appara t correspondant au poste s lectionn Synoptique DP 1 5 Broken 3 States DO Test in progress Delta Le poste pr sente les indications suivantes D fectueux 1 e Couleur verte s il ny a aucune lampe d fectueuse Couleur jaune si le nombre de lampes d fectueuses est inf rieur au seuil param tr Couleur rouge si le nombre de lampes d fectueuses est sup rieur au seuil param tr tats 2 e C
242. se la centralina e gia nello stato di inibizione attiva corto circuito sulla linea di controllo lampade Disattiva inibizione e accettato se la centralina e nello stato di Inibizione attiva Controls on control unit 1 E Acquistion Y Ente Set date and time Set test 0 00 00 Functional tests Operating time test Length of test period in days 1 I Test duration in minutes 3 T Time of test 00 00 00 00 start day and month 01401 WEIEN Restore e accettato se la centralina e nello stato di inibizione attiva Rest o Utility non e in corto circuito sulla linea di controllo lampade Test Funzionale non e accettato se stato di inibizione attiva test funzionale in corso test di autonomia pari o dispari in corso corto circuito sulla linea di controllo lampade Test Autonomia lampade pari Test Autonomia lampade dispari non accettato se carica non completa sulle lampade 24h stato di inibizione attiva test funzionale in corso test di autonomia pari o dispari in corso corto circuito sulla linea di controllo lampade Rest accettato se Dardo Plus PC LITE in emergenza e non in Corto linea Eye Schneider IT 17 Proprieta Generali DARDO PLUS 1 Bees Status Test Marne Dardo Plus 1 es Address Acquisition cycles 4 O ee NES Notes Selezionando nel punto 1 e possibile attribuire un nome alla centralina Selezionando nel punto 2
243. selecting them individually just press Select all 8 first Use the Notes button 4 to add a comment to one or more fields To select the logs press CTRL and left click the mouse on the L H edge of the grid The logs with a note are displayed with an asterisk at the top of the description The Acknowledge button 7 deletes the red icon in the box 1 and any beep indicating that the event has been acknowledged in other words it removes the system from fault status Control unit path 10 indicates to which system the control unit selected in the table is connected The PRINT button 5 is used to print the data selected in the grid The printer selection page is displayed before the print page You must select a printer in order to print but you can also exit without printing using the Exit button 9 Dardo Plus PC LITE EN 41 Schneider WA Printer settings List of fields Total pages Print fram page To page na 16 gt lill Lines printing per row of data gt 1 7 ae Last ling printin ay Description JS i IP W Print graphics LLLLLLLLLLL 20 Spacing 0 characters Select all 13 Remove selection Character Arial 10 Boldface Italics Printer Print Gurt 21 22 23 24 A list of the grid columns required for printing is displayed on the L H side of the screen Click on the field required for printing to print that field Click again to undo the selection 11 The
244. sentito avviare e terminare un ciclo di acquisizione Il profilo amministratore pu fare tutte le operazioni in particolare modificare le caratteristiche degli oggetti dei livelli e definire nuovi utenti Ospiti Sono permesse le visualizzazioni di tutti i dati del programma l avvio e l arresto del ciclo di acquisizione Se i dati inseriti durante l installazione non sono corretti all avvio del programma appare la finestra per inserire nuovamente i codici di attivazione del software Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider IT 5 EP Electric Es Customer cod 1 1SSS cod 2 3456 345678 Ze Lite Map Customer i ass 1 0 2 OK Finestra Principale Tramite i pulsanti di comando si possono effettuare velocemente alcune operazioni molte delle quali utilizzando il pulsante destro del mouse sugli oggetti File Configuration Authorizations Options ustem Level Login DefaultAdministrator IT 6 Schneider d Electric Dardo Plus PC LITE pulsanti hanno i seguenti significati e Pulsante Nuovo 1 e Pulsante Elimina 2 e Pulsante Propriet 3 e Pulsante Avvia acquisizione 4 e Pulsante Arresta Acquisizione 5 e Pulsante Uscita 6 permette di inserire un nuovo impianto o centralin
245. sin ptico As cores que os leds podem assumir e que identificam o estado s o Cinza Vermelho Amarelo e Verde Consultar o fasc culo espec fico de cada central para saber o significado das cores Ao clicar no sin ptico de uma central a selecc o feita evidenciada pelo contorno do quadrado que se torna azul PT 14 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider DF 1 Broken ES States amp Test in progress Delta Commands Open Control Unit Remove Control Unik Properties Ao clicar com a tecla direita do mouse no sin ptico de uma central seleccionada em todas as modalidades de controlo abre se um menu que permite efectuar as seguintes opera es e Comandos Commands 3 abre o menu dos comandos poss veis e Abre central Open Control Unit 4 equivale a premer a flecha passa para o n vel superior e visualizar as l mpadas aplicadas a ela e Elimina central Remove Control Unit 5 seleccion lo equivale a premer o bot o Elimina descrito no par grafo Bot es de comando e Propriedades Properties 6 mostra as informac es sobre a central seleccionada equivale a premer o bot o Propriedades presente na janela principal e descrito no par grafo Bot es de comando Tipos de centrais geridas O programa DARDO PLUS PC LITE capaz de dialogar com os seguintes tipos de centrais o UNIDADE DE CONTROLO DARDO PLUS central usada para l mpada
246. st autonomie 3 Zobrazuje se datum test autonomie lich ch lamp Datum test autonomie sud ch lamp ur te tak e k zobrazovan mu datu p ipo tete jeden den CS 20 DARDO PLUS 1 General Status Test Functional tests 0 201 2006 03 01 2006 04 01 2006 05 01 2006 06 01 2006 DR 2008 UO 2006 09 01 2006 10401 2006 11 01 2006 12 01 2006 13401 2006 14 01 2006 1501 2006 Operating time test 07 12 2007 5 00 00 14 7 2200r 6 00 00 2148202007 3 00 00 204 2 2007 5 00 00 0401 2006 6 00 00 11 01 2006 6 00 00 10 01 2006 5 00 00 25 01 2006 5 00 00 01 102 2006 9 00 00 08 02 2006 9 00 00 15 02 2006 6 00 00 22 02 2008 8 00 00 2902006 6 00 00 I 003 2008 3 00 00 Schneider Electric Dardo Plus PC LITE DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM D lkov ovl d n samonap jec ch lamp DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM je d c jednotka pou van pro samonap jec lampy na n je mo n pl novat funk n testy a testy autonomie a nakonfigurovat jejich datum hodinu a pravideln opakov n jejich prov d n T to d c jednotce je mo n odes lat interaktivn p kazy Kliknut m na pozad zvol te Vlo it d c jednotku otev e se okno kter umo n zvolit druh p stroje jen m b t vlo en do syst mu Po proveden volby je t eba nadefinovat adresu d c jednotky a toto vlo en potvrdit stisknut m tla tka OK Na poz
247. started automatically after a few seconds with the general user profile This delay 3 in the program starting automatically can be set using the configuration options The features of the two user levels are as follows Administrator Can display all the program data with enabling of settings and commands and can start and end an acquisition cycle The administrator is able to perform all operations in particular he can modify the features of the objects and levels and define new users Guests General users are able to view all the program data and can start and stop the acquisition cycle If the data entered during installation is not correct when the program starts up a window appears in which to enter the software activation codes again Dardo Plus PC LITE EN 5 Schneider Electric cod 1 1SSS cod 2 3456 345678 e g Customer Setup Ver X X X Eil Ze Lite Map Customer i ass 1 3 2 Main window Using the command buttons you can carry out some operations quickly many of them by right clicking on objects File Configuration Authorizations Options stem Level Login Default amp dministrator EN 6 Schn eid er Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric The buttons have the following meanings
248. superiore e visualizzare le lampade ad essa applicate e Elimina centralina 5 selezionata equivale a premere il pulsante Elimina descritto nel paragrafo Pulsanti di comando e Propriet 6 visualizza le informazioni sulla centralina selezionata equivale a premere il pulsante Propriet presente sulla finestra principale e descritto nel paragrafo Pulsanti di comando Tipi di centraline gestite Il programma DARDO PLUS PC LITE in grado dialogare con le seguenti tipologie di centraline o DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT centralina utilizzata per lampade autoalimentate dove e possibile programmare i test funzionali e i test di autonomia configurandone data ora e periodicit Centralina abilitata alla supervisione di lampade autoalimentate invio di comandi sia da tastiera sia da supervisore e prelievo dei dati di stato lampada da supervisore Su questa centralina possibile inviare comandi interattivi DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM centralina utilizzata per lampade autoalimentate dove possibile programmare i test funzionali e i test di autonomia configurandone data ora e periodicit Centralina abilitata alla supervisione di lampade autoalimentate invio dei comandi a mezzo della presenza di tensione 24 Vdc su determinati ingressi Su questa centralina non possibile inviare comandi interattivi Configurazione indirizzi centraline Gli indirizzi delle centraline vengono definiti in fase di i
249. t install sur le PC consulter le manuel du CONVERTISSEUR Ethernet RS232 Authorizations Options Su Lar Lamp information New communications port Remove communications pork Le menu de configuration pr sente trois sous menus qui permettent d entrer de supprimer et ou de modifier le type de communication existant entre le PC et le syst me e Nouveau port de communication 1 e Supprimer le port de communication 2 FR 10 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Entr e d un nouveau port de communication Mew communications port ES Choose communications Port 1200 E 72 Ce menu permet d entrer dans la configuration du programme un nouveau port de communication parmi ceux qui sont pr sents sur le PC Le programme pr sente une liste de ports s rie allant de COM1 COM256 1 la souris permet den s lectionner un il est possible de voir en bas les parametres de communication utilis s qui sont fixes Il convient de rappeler que le programme DARDO PLUS PC LITE dispose pour les systemes uniguement des ports s rie configur s l int rieur du programme et non pas de tous les ports s rie qui sont pr sents dans Windows ATTENTION U LE NOUVEAU PORT S RIE DOIT TRE ENTR PENDANT L INSTALLATION DE DARDO PLUS PC LITE SUR LE PC DE SURVEILLANCE A ATTENTION D LA CONNEXION VIA CONVERTISSEUR RS232 ETHERNET NEST POSSIBLE QUE SI LE PILOTE DE COMMUNICATION A ETE INSTALLE PRECEDEMME
250. t spu t n ru n a to stisknut m tla tka 1 Spu t n sb ru dat T mto p kazem Ge prov d t sb r dat na objektech v ech syst m p ipojen ch k PC Tla tko Spu t n sb ru dat je pops no v odstavci Ovl dac tla tka RO Pokud chcete prov st sb r dat pouze na objektech p ipojen ch k jedn d c jednotce klikn te prav m tla tkem my i na synopticky panel zvolen d c jednotky ve v ech ovl dac ch re imech Otev e se menu v n m je t eba zvolit polo ku P kazy 2 DP 1 Broken ke Sales Commands ke Test in progress Open Control Unit Remove Control Unit Properties CS 34 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric Otev e se okno zvolte v n m polo ku Sb r da a spus te ji stisknut m tla tka Odeslat 3 Controls on control unit 1 Acquisition F Acquisition Inhibit test Disable inhibit Restore Functional tests Even lamps autonomy test Odd lamps autonomy test Rest Test duration in minutes 5 0 Time of test 00 00 00 00 start day and month 01 01 01 101 2008 Mezi p kazy zvolte 4 p kaz kter chcete odeslat Lampy Informace na synoptick ch panelech lampy Chcete li zobrazit stav lamp p i azen ch ur it d c jednotce je t eba ji zvolit a pot spustit sb r dat pomoc p slu n ho p kazu Po ukon en sb ru dat se v echny
251. te ver as propriedades do objecto seleccionado na tela permite iniciar a aquisi o permite interromper a aquisi o Neste caso todos os comandos pendentes nas centrais s o eliminados permite sair do programa tendo antes interrompido a aquisi o e Bot o Restabelece Base de Dados 7 carrega a ltima c pia da base de dados na subpasta e Bot o Backup Base de Dados 8 e cone Compacta o 9 Dardo Plus PC LITE tempbck do direct rio de instala o Ao premer o bot o o programa fechado para permitir o carregamento dos dados para o pr ximo rein cio reiniciar o programa como descrito e digitar a senha salva uma c pia da base de dados no momento em premido A c pia salva na subpasta tempbck do direct rio de instala o e o ficheiro se chama dardoLite mdb com o programa aberto automaticamente feita uma c pia de backup da base de dados por hora icone normalmente n o vis vel Aparece quando a base de dados supera 5MByte e n o foi feita a compacta o h mais de 1 semana A compacta o feita atrav s de um clique O premer o bot o o programa fechado para permitir que ele se desconecte da base de dados reiniciar o programa como descrito e digitar a senha Schneider PAL d Electric ATENC O O BOT O RESTABELECIMENTO BASE DE DADOS SOBRESCREVE A LTIMA COPIA LE FEITA DA BASE DE DADOS EVENTUAIS MUDANCAS REALIZADAS ENTRE O MOMENTO EM OUE FOI FEITA
252. ter att ha bestamt den kommunikationsport som ska anv ndas f r anl ggningen och egenskaperna som denna m ste ha kan du infoga anlaggningen och borja definiera dess egenskaper fonstret p datorns sk rm finns en lista Over kommunikationsportar d r du kan v lja den som ska anv ndas listan inneh ller ocks den tidigare valda porten dvs porten som valdes n r den nya porten definierades v lj den Input window E Insert system Name Neweblame Choose a Port W Enable acquisition Description A Internal Contacte External Contacts Om du gar till niv n anlaggning och hogerklickar p bakgrunden kan du v lja Infoga anl ggning ett fonster Oppnas och du blir fr gad att st lla in kommunikaitonsporten och ge alla beskrivningar som kr vs f r att gora anlaggningen unik och entydig Mata in anlaggningens namn i textrutan Namn Valj en oanv nd port bland alla portar som finns i dialogrutan V lj port Valj alternativet Aktivera forvarv for att till ta forvarv av data fran anlaggningen Mata in anlaggningens beskrivning i textrutan Beskrivning alternativ Mata in Interna kontaktpersoner och Externa kontaktpersoner i avsedda textfalt alternativ textefaltena Beskrivning och Kontaktpersoner kan du exempelvis mata in adressen for anl ggningen och namnen pa underhallsansvarig personal Nar du har matat in begarda data och bekraftat med OK visas anlaggningen i huvudfonstret Fosakra dig om att k
253. tet visar egenskaperna f r det p sk rmen markerade objektet startar forvarvet avbryter p g ende forvarv det fallet elimineras samtliga oavslutade styrenhetskommandon avslutar programmet efter att ha stoppat forvarvet e Knappen terst ll databas 7 e Knappen Sakerhetskopiera databas 8 e Ikonen Komprimera 9 Dardo Plus PC LITE hamtar den senaste kopian pa databasen fran mappen tempbck i installationskatalogen Trycker du pa den har knappen stangs programmet for att tillata uppladdning av namnda data vid nasta start starta om programmet enligt beskrivningen och mata in losenordet sparar en kopia av databasen nar knappen trycks ned Kopian sparas i undermappen tempbck i installations katalogen och filen far namnet dardoLite mdb I automatisk drift och n r programmet r ppet utf rs en s kerhetskopia varje timma den h r ikonen r i vanliga fall dold Ikonen visas n r databasens storlek verskrider SMByte och ingen komprimering har k rts p mer n 1 vecka Komprimeringen utf rs med ett enda klcik Trycker du p knappen st ngs programmet s att detsamma kan bortkoppla fr n databasen starta om programmet enligt beskrivningen och mata in l senordet Electric SV 7 Schneider VIKTIGT KNAPPEN ATERST LL DATABAS OVERSKRIVER DATABASENS SENASTE KOPIA P U NUVARANDE EVENTUELLA ANDRINGAR MAN UTFORT P DEN SOM AR I BRUK KOMMER ATT GA FORLORADE Nivaknappar e
254. teur clique sur le bouton Identify reconna tre dans le menu Journal v nements Recherche sur les v nements EEN Login Default amp dministrator Un double clic sur la case 1 Journal des v nements fait appara tre la fen tre de gestion des enregistrements Dardo Plus PC LITE FR 39 Schneider Event log Date System M Cont Lil Lon LamDP Name Description O 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERWER First M LOBO Lamprequired O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVER First M A Jlamprequied O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVERT First ON Jlamprequied O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERVER First ii Jlamprequied Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVER First II Jlamprequied Detault dministator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVERI First ON L mprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 24 SERVER First II D Jlamprequied Default inistrator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First ON BB L mprequired Default inistrator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First II Pi Jlamprequied Deiadbdntrtialo 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First M BY Lampreguied Detault dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 23 SERVER First ON BB Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First O A lampreguied Detault dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVERI First mi D Lamprequied Default dministrahor
255. there are faults such as communication errors utility mode rest mode faulty status emergency status test disabled status or short circuit status on the light control line e Yellow under other circumstances Test in progress 3 e Red test in progress o Green no test in progress Delta 4 Red if the difference in date and time between the PC and the control unit is greater than the value set in the parameters Green if the opposite is the case The Delta indicates whether the date and time for performing the tests do not match the program settings Commands The date time and frequency of the Function Tests 1 and Autonomy Tests 2 can be set The Function Test and Autonomy Test command window can be used to set all the control parameters such as test frequency in days 3 test duration in minutes 4 date 5 and time 6 in hours and minutes of test start These settings alter those programmed on the control unit EN 16 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE Electric Description of commands Test disabling is not accepted if e the control unit is already in disabled status Short circuit on the light control line Deactivate disabling is accepted if the control unit is in disabled status Controls on control unit 1 E Acquistion Y Enter Set date and time Set test 0 00 00 Functional tests Operating time test Length of test period in days 1 Test duration in minutes
256. tions as on the control unit control panels Test results and any faults to the systems controlled are recorded by the DARDO PC LITE program thus enabling the operator to search for and print the acquired events The application provides a view of the status of each system and all the controlled lights The application displays and stores in a memory all the alarms and faults detected by the system Importance of the manual This instruction manual contains the information needed to use the product The reproduction and transmission of this manual to Third Parties is strictly prohibited without the written consent of SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC reserves the right to make any changes without prior notice for the purpose of improving its own products This means that the equipment actually supplied may not be exactly the same as that shown in the figures in the manual Please ensure that any amendment or update furnished by the manufacturer is inserted and included in this instruction manual Keeping the manual in a safe place The manual must be kept for future reference for the entire lifetime of the unit and must be made available for every operation or subsequent reinstallation of the unit itself Dardo Plus PC LITE EN 1 Schneider Electric Symbols used Within the instruction manual a series of symbols are used in order to draw attention to suggestions notes limitations and instructions concerning the correct use and saf
257. tupem do programu DARDO PLUS PC LITE zadat tyto informace Chcete li ze seznamu odstranit n jak jm no nebo jej zm nit je t eba nejprve my zvolit kl kter se nach z ve sloupku 8 nalevo od dky odpov daj c u ivateli Zm na hesla Change Password E Old password pe _ Mew password Contirm neve pass word Toto menu umo uje rychl m zp sobem zm nit heslo profilu pod n m jste vstoupili do programu Menu Zm na hesla je aktivn pouze pokud jste do programu vstoupili pod profilem kter je v Seznamu povolen Chcete li zm nit heslo je t eba vlo it star heslo pot nov a potvrdit jej CS 26 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric Funkce Aby mohl program prov d t kontroly syst mu vyhovuj c m zp sobem je mo n m nit po et pokus o p ipojen po et pl novan ch p ipojen d lku trv n sb ru dat atd Krom zm ny jazyka zobrazov n informac na rozhran je mo n vlo it i pozn mky kter se budou zobrazovat a upozor ovat oper tora na speci ln operace prob haj c v syst mu File Configuration Authorizations Mana Ty lar i Modify parameters Language Warnings Menu Funkce ma ty i podmenu Zm na parametr 1 e Jazyk 2 Upozorn n 3 Zm na parametr Z tohoto menu je mo n m nit parametry kter d fungov n DARDO PLUS PC LITE Time Out Dardo Parameters Acquisition attempts
258. turns YELLOW Dardo Parameters TimeOut Duration Level Names Log Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings Percentage threshold of value of broken lamps Current threshold value 50 Mew threshold value 50 Cancel Ger EN 30 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider Delta This is the maximum time difference in minutes permitted between the TEST frequency set in DARDO PLUS PC LITE and that programmed in the control unit In practice it is the maximum difference in minutes you wish to allow between the time indicated by the PC clock and the time measured by the control unit clock Dardo Parameters TimeOut Duration Level Names Log Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings Maximum delta of counters in minutes Current value 10 Mew value 10 a Settings Select Tooltip images to link a graphic image with each Control unit or Light object Dardo Parameters TimeOut Duration Level Names Log Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta settings Iw Tooltip images Server Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider EN 31 d Electric DP 1 Example of cursor positioning Broken near the DARDO PLUS icon DO States E Test in progress Example of cursor positioning near the selected light icon note the thicker blue edge To link an image to a light you must 1 2 3 EN 32 place the cursor on the light s synoptic panel click on it to
259. ulsante Riconosci 7 elimina l icona rossa presente nella casella 1 e l eventuale segnale di beep indicando che evento stato riconosciuto in altre parole toglie il sistema dallo stato di anomalia Percorso centralina 10 indica in quale impianto e collegata la centralina selezionata nella tabella Il pulsante Stampa 5 permette di stampare i dati selezionati sulla griglia Prima della finestra di stampa vera e propria visualizzata la finestra di scelta della stampante Per stampare obbligatorio selezionare una stampante ma possibile uscire senza stampare utilizzando il tasto Esci 9 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider IT 41 BP Electric Val Printer settings List of fields Total pages Print fram page To page ma T 16 lill Lines printing per row of data gt 1 7 F Last lind printin Jo Description ko I Y aF w Print graphics LL LL LL 20 Spacing 0 characters Select all 13 Remove selection Character Arial 10 Boldface Halics Printer Print Chart 21 22 23 24 Sulla sinistra presente una lista delle colonne della griglia che si desidera stampare possibile selezionare quali campi mandare in stampa con un click del mouse sul nome del campo Un ulteriore click toglie la selezione 11 pulsanti Seleziona tutto 12 e Togli selezione 13 posti sotto la lista permettono rispettivamente di selezionare e deselezionare tutti i campi Nella parte superio
260. ult amp dministrator 31708 2007 9 03 21 SERVERI First mM LLemprened o o Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 21 SERVER First M D Lamprequired Default amp dministrator 312082007 9 03 20 SERVER First mM B Lamprequired _ o Default amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M o O J Sa Lamprequired O Default amp dministrator 314082007 9 03 20 SERVERI Fist Ot B Lamp regured O Defaul amp dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERVER First M o D i Lamprequiredo _ Default amp dministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 20 SERWER Fist M E Lamp regured O Defaul amp dministrator 21208 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M arp required _ Default amp dministrator _ 31 08 2007 9 03 18 SERVER First M Lamp required Default dministrator EE U e DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 8 53 46 Default amp dministrator Control unit route LEVEL SERVER First FloorDardo Plus 1 Number of records i 1 pe E vm EEE 10 N mero de eventos number of records 1 mostra o n mero de eventos da tabela de registo log Bot o Backup 2 salva uma c pia do conte do da grade dos registos mostrada no momento em que premido A c pia do conte do salvada na pasta que tem o nome do programa O ficheiro se chama log txt os campos s o separados por por isso num formato utiliz vel tamb m em MS Excel O bot o Cancela Deleta 3 permit
261. ve sono visualizzati gli eventi errori segnalazioni con la periodicit impostata Un uso importante per gli impianti di illuminazione nel caso si debbano preventivare pulizie degli apparecchi o manutenzioni programmate ad esempio pulizia apparecchi Allo scadere dell avvertimento sara visualizzato l errore segnalazione sulla barra 1 e o System Level Login Default amp dministrator Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider IT 33 GH Electric Warnings Description Control Acquisizione Dopo avere inserito nel programma l impianto e le centraline che lo compongono non necessario eseguire l inserimento delle lampade collegate alle centraline Dopo avere terminato la configurazione sufficiente avviare un ciclo di acquisizione che consente di visualizzare i sinottici delle lampade collegate e comunque di disporre di un elenco delle lampade collegate e delle lampade non collegate L acquisizione oltre che con procedura automatica alle scadenze definite in fase di configurazione pu essere avviata manualmente N B presente una condizione che pu avviare automaticamente il ciclo di acquisizione indipendentemente dalla volont dell operatore all avvio del programma se non si inserisce la password e si fa scadere il tempo utile per il suo inserimento si entra nel programma come ospite ma contemporaneamente parte il ciclo di acquisizione Il ciclo di acquisizione pu essere avviato manualmente pr
262. vg r det tillg ngliga utrymmet definieras av anv ndaren i menyn Redigera parametrar N r programmet st ngs om anv ndaren svarar ja p fr gan som visas precis innan programmet avslutas sparas en kopia av databasen inuti en mapp som n mns efter aktuell veckodag Filen heter dardoLite mdb Databasen kan ven sparas med knappen S kerhetskopiera databas Registrerade h ndelser g ller programmets funktion och kan vara e programmets ppning eller st ngning e kommunikationens status e f r ndringar i styrenheternas eller lampornas status Signaleringarna kan vara felmeddelanden eller varningar For att Oppna fonstret for hantering av handelser r cker det att du dubbelklickar p senaste felets eller varningens visningsrad 1 langst ned p sk rmen o EZ Fran den har sidan kan du utf ra sokningar och skriva ut rapporter Om en h ndelse avkanns signalerar programmet registreringen med ett terkommande pipljud kan konfigureras i menyn Alternativ Parametrar Logg F rutom denna ljudsignalering visas en r d triangel p raden vid rutan Handelselogg Signaleringen blir kvar tills en operator trycker knappen Kvittera i menyn Handelselogg Soka handelser EEN Login Default amp dministrator Dubbelklicka p rutan 1 handelselogg s Oppnas ett fonster f r hantering av loggposter Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider SV 39 Electric Event log Date System M Cont Lil Lon LamD
263. videln opakov n jejich prov d n d c jednotka ur en k zen samonap jec ch lamp odes l p kazy pomoc nap t 24 Vdc kter p iv d na ur it vstupy T to d c jednotce nen mo n odes lat interaktivn p kazy Konfigurace adres d c ch jednotek Adresy d c ch jednotek se definuj p i instalaci syst mu kter z vis na druhu d c jednotky spinac Rotary nebo inicializace Adresy nakonfigurovan v d c ch jednotk ch je t eba zan st rovn do programu DARDO PLUS PC LITE e d c jednotky DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT samonap jec lampy t mto typ m d c ch jednotek Ize p i adit adresy od 001 do 255 desetinn z libovoln ch sel e d c jednotky DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT RM d lkov ovl d n samonap jecich lamp t mto typ m d c ch jednotek Ize p i adit adresy od 001 do 255 desetinn z libovoln ch sel Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 15 Electric DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT Ovl d n samonap jec ch lamp DARDO PLUS CONTROL UNIT je d c jednotka pou van pro samonap jec lampy na n je mo n pl novat funk n testy a testy autonomie a nakonfigurovat jejich datum hodinu a pravideln opakov n jejich prov d n T to d c jednotce je mo n odes lat interaktivn p kazy Pokud chcete vlo it d c jednotku klikn te na pozad a zvolte Vlo it d c jednotku Otev
264. y n zvy Urove 1 a Uroven 2 Dardo Parameters Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings TimeDut Duration Level Names Log Use default for Server Mew name for Server Server Log Je mo n nakonfigurovat po et z znam kter chcete uchov vat v archivu Log ud losti signalizace 1 Volba Grep ozna uje p tomnost zvukov ho sign lu p i ka d m z znamu jeho pou it nen povinn 2 Dardo Parameters Eg Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Settings Tire Out Duration Level Names Log Maximum number of log 000 1 Beep o 2 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider CS 29 Electric Pokusy o sb r dat Po et pokus o p ipojen k syst mu za elem sb ru dat kter program DARDO PLUS PC LITE provede p ed signalizac stavu chyby v komunikaci Tyto pokusy se nastavuj v rozp t minim ln 6 a maxim ln 20 Dardo Parameters Tire ut Duration Level Names Acquisition attempts Threshold Delta Current value of acquisition attempts E Delay cycles after test for lamp acquisition d Limit Tato hodnota ur uje jak procento lamp s anom li je p pustn ne na syst mu dojde k signalizaci z vady Barva kter se objev na synoptick m panelu d c ch jednotek z vis na hodnot nastaven v tomto parametru Nap klad je li nastaven hodnota 50 p ed rozsv cen m erven kontrolky se mu
265. y pressing the OK button In the background the synoptic panel 3 for the selected control unit appears DP 1 Ch SoBroken e States 3 Test in progress G Delta For more information on the features of the individual control units refer to the paragraph Types of control units managed The control units are displayed with a square At the top it shows the abbreviation identifying the control unit and a series of LEDs which change colour according to the control unit s status When acquisition is started the status of the synoptic panel LEDs is updated The LEDs identifying the status can be Grey Red Yellow and Green Refer to the control unit booklet for the meaning of the colours Click on the synoptic panel of a control unit and the selection is shown by the border of the square turning blue EN 14 Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneider DF 1 Broken ES States Delta Test in progress Commands Open Control Unit Remove Control Unit Properties Right click on the synoptic panel of a selected control unit in all control modes and a menu opens to let you perform the following operations e Commands 3 e Open Control Unit 4 e Remove Control Unit 5 e Properties 6 opens the menu containing the possible commands is equivalent to pressing the go to upper level arrow and displays the lights applied to the control unit select
266. zionare la stampante 22 Mandare in esecuzione la stampa 23 o uscire dalla finestra di stampa senza fare nulla 24 ATTENZIONE U I CARATTERI DI STAMPANTE VISUALIZZATI SONO QUELLI DELLA STAMPANTE PREDEFINITA NEL PANNELLO DI CONTROLLO IT 42 Schneider Dardo Plus PC LITE d Electric II pulsante Ricerca 6 permette di selezionare un sottoinsieme d eventi che sono visualizzati sulla griglia dei record 25 Log search System SER VERT First Floor 01 d F Event hype Event Corral uni De Commpx skor Errar Liter be ne Z i O E E Mabe wa JL e 30 Tipologie di eventi registrati La Ricerca pu essere l insieme di pi criteri combinati in qualunque modo Ad esempio selezionando il nome di un impianto 25 sulla lista delle centraline 26 verranno trovate solo quelle appartenenti a quell impianto e l eventuale lista di lampade associate 27 Una lista non selezionata significa che tutti gli elementi sono compresi Vi sono quattro tipi di evento 28 errori di comunicazione errori di funzionamento del programma eventi legati alle centraline eventi legati alle lampade Gli eventi legati alle centraline e alle lampade sono registrazioni di cambio di stato delle caratteristiche relative 29 La lista errore permette 30 di scegliere solo eventi di errore o solo eventi informativi La lista utente permette di scegliere solo gli eventi legati ad un certo utente 31 Dal
267. zione acustica appare un triangolo rosso sul rigo della casella Log eventi Questa segnalazione rimane presente fino a quando un operatore nel men Log eventi non preme il tasto Riconosci Ricerca sugli eventi EH Login Default amp dministrator Con doppio click sulla casella 1 di log degli eventi si apre la finestra di gestione dei record di log Dardo Plus PC LITE Schneid er IT 39 Electric Event log Date System M Cont Lil Lon LamDP Name Description O 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERWER First M LOBO Lamprequired O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVER First M A Jlamprequied O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVERT First ON Jlamprequied O DefaultAdministrator 31 08 2007 9 03 26 SERVER First ii Jlamprequied Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 26 SERVER First II Jlamprequied Detault dministator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVERI First ON L mprequired Default dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 24 SERVER First II D Jlamprequied Default inistrator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First ON BB L mprequired Default inistrator 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First II Pi Jlamprequied Deiadbdntrtialo 31 08 2007 9 03 24 SERVER First M BY Lampreguied Detault dministrator 31 08 2007 3 03 23 SERVER First ON BB Jlamprequied Default dministrater 31 08 2007 9 03 23 SERVER First O A lampreguied Detault dmi

DARDO PLUS PC LITE - Schneider Electric

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents